Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
480
Houston, TX 77070
Tel: 281 890-4566
FAX: 281 890-3301
Web: www.coade.com
January 1, 2002
Enclosed please find Version 4.3 of the PVElite Pressure Vessel Design and Analysis software program.
This package includes a CD-ROM and update pages to the manual. The program installs using the Setup
program on the CD. The CD contains an auto-run feature that should automatically start the installation
process. If it does not start, execute the setup program contained on the CD. The installation serial
number is located on the inside of the CD jacket. Do not discard the jacket.
For network users, the file netuser.bat must be executed from each workstation. This will register
some critical DLLs that allow the 3-D modeler to function properly. If this is not done, the 3-D graphics
modeler will abort with an error. The error will state that some XML components are not available.
Sincerely,
PVElite is a PC-based
pressure vessel design
and analysis software
program developed,
marketed, and sold by
COADE Engineering
Software.
Version 4.30
Revised 1/2002
This page is intentionally left blank.
PVElite - User Guide
Contents
Preface
PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT P-2
ACCEPTANCE OF TERMS OF AGREEMENT BY THE USER P-2
LICENSE GRANT P-2
TERM P-2
LIMITED WARRANTY P-3
ENTIRE AGREEMENT P-3
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES P-3
GENERAL P-4
DISCLAIMER - PVElite P-4
HOOPS‘ License Grant P-6
Chapter: 1 Introduction
What is PVElite? 1-1
What is the purpose and scope of the PVElite Program? 1-1What distinguishes PVElite from other
commercial pressure vessel packages? 1-3
What Applications are Available? 1-4
General Vessels 1-4
Complete Vertical Vessels 1-4
Complete Horizontal Vessels 1-4
Individual Shells & Heads 1-4
Conical Sections 1-4
Vessel Nozzles 1-4
Flanges 1-4
Base Rings 1-5
Lifting Lug 1-5
Pipe & Pad 1-5
Local Stress Calculation Due To Attached Loads 1-5
Thin-Walled Expansion Joints 1-5
Thick-Walled Expansion Joints 1-5
TEMA Tubesheets 1-5
ASME Tubesheets 1-5
Floating Heads 1-5
Half-Pipe Jacket 1-6
Large Openings 1-6
Rectangular Vessels 1-6
Shells & Heads 1-6
Nozzles 1-6
Flanges 1-6
Horizontal Vessels 1-6
Legs & Lugs 1-7
WRC 107 1-7
Summary 1-7
WRC 297 1-7
Appendix Y Flanges 1-7
About the PVElite Documentation 1-8
Program Support / User Assistance 1-9
COADE Technical Support Phone Numbers 1-9
i
PVElite - User Guide
Updates 1-10
Licenses 1-10
Full Run 1-10
Lease 1-10
Limited Run 1-10
Summary of Version 3.5 Improvements 1-11
Summary of Version 3.6 Improvements 1-11
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features 1-11
Summary of PVElite Version 4.00 Improvements 1-12
Summary of Version 4.1 Improvements 1-12
Summary of Version 4.2 Improvements 1-13
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features Version 4.2 1-14
Summary of Version 4.3 Improvements 1-14
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features Version 4.3 1-14
ii
PVElite - User Guide
iii
PVElite - User Guide
iv
PVElite - User Guide
v
PVElite - User Guide
vi
PVElite - User Guide
vii
PVElite - User Guide
viii
PVElite - User Guide
ix
PVElite - User Guide
x
PVElite - User Guide
xi
PVElite - User Guide
xii
PVElite - User Guide
xiii
PVElite - User Guide
xiv
PVElite - User Guide
xv
PVElite - User Guide
xvi
PVElite - User Guide
Conclusions 15-11
Example Problem 15-14
xvii
PVElite - User Guide
xviii
PVElite - User Guide
Chapter: 24
The Half-Pipe Module
Introduction 24-1
Purpose, Scope, and Technical Basis 24-1
Discussion of Input Data 24-3
Discussion of Results 24-6
Example Problem 24-8
xix
PVElite - User Guide
xx
3UHIDFH
7KH3UHIDFHSURYLGHVLPSRUWDQW
OHJDOLQIRUPDWLRQIRU39(OLWHXVHUV
&RQWHQWV
$FFHSWDQFHRI7HUPVRI
$JUHHPHQWE\WKH8VHU
/LFHQVH*UDQW
7HUP
/LPLWHG:DUUDQW\
(QWLUH$JUHHPHQW
/LPLWDWLRQVRI5HPHGLHV
*HQHUDO
'LVFODLPHU
39(OLWH
PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT PVElite - User Guide
LICENSE GRANT
In return for the payment of the license fee associated with the acquisition of the Licensed
Program(s) from COADE, COADE hereby grants you the following non-exclusive rights
with regard to the Licensed Programs(s):
a. Use of the License Program(s) on one machine. Under no circumstance is the
License Program to be executed without a COADE External Software Lock
(ESL).
b. To transfer the Licensed Program(s) and license it to a third party if the third party
acknowledges in writing its agreement to accept the Licensed Program(s) under
the terms and conditions of this License Agreement; if you transfer the Licensed
Program(s), you must at the same time either transfer all copies whether printed or
in machine-readable form to the same party or destroy any copies not so trans-
ferred; the requirement to transfer and/or destroy copies of the Licensed Pro-
gram(s) also pertains to any and all modifications and portions of Licensed
Program(s) contained or merged into other programs.
You agree to reproduce and include the copyright notice as it appears on the Licensed Pro-
gram(s) on any copy, modification or merged portion of the Licensed Program(s).
THIS LICENSE DOES NOT GIVE YOU ANY RIGHT TO USE COPY, MODIFY, OR
TRANSFER THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) OR ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR
MERGED PORTION THEREOF, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY
PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT.
IF YOU TRANSFER POSSESSION OF ANY COPY, MODIFICATION OR MERGED
PORTION OF THE LICENSED PROGRAM(S) TO ANOTHER PARTY, THE LICENSE
GRANTED HEREUNDER TO YOU IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED.
TERM
This License Agreement is effective upon acceptance and use of the Licensed Program(s)
until terminated in accordance with the terms of this License Agreement. You may termi-
nate the License Agreement at any time by destroying the Licensed Program(s) together
with all copies, modifications, and merged portions thereof in any form. This License
2 Preface
PVElite - User Guide PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT
Agreement will also terminate upon conditions set forth elsewhere in this Agreement or
automatically in the event you fail to comply with any term or condition of this License
Agreement. You hereby agree upon such termination to destroy the Licensed Program(s)
together with all copies, modifications, and merged portions thereof in any form.
LIMITED WARRANTY
The Licensed Program(s), i.e. the tangible proprietary software, is provided “AS IS”
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, AND
EXPLICITLY EXCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. The entire risk as to the quality and
performance of the Licensed Program(s) is with you.
Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of limited warranties, and, in those jurisdic-
tions the above exclusions may not apply. This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal
rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from one jurisdiction to another.
COADE does not warrant that the functions contained in the Licensed Program(s) will
meet your requirements or that the operation of the program will be uninterrupted or error
free.
COADE does warrant, however, that the CD(s), i.e. the tangible physical medium on
which the Licensed Program(s) is furnished, to be free from defects in materials and work-
manship under normal use for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of delivery to you
as evidenced by a copy of your receipt.
COADE warrants that any program errors will be fixed by COADE, at COADE’s expense,
as soon as possible after the problem is reported and verified. However, only those cus-
tomers current on their update/maintenance contracts are eligible to receive the corrected
version of the program.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT
This written Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the parties concerning
the Licensed Program(s). No agent, distributor, salesman or other person acting or repre-
senting themselves to act on behalf of COADE has the authority to modify or supplement
the limited warranty contained herein, nor any of the other specific provisions of this
Agreement, and no such modifications or supplements shall be effective unless agreed to
in writing by an officer of COADE having authority to act on behalf of COADE in this
regard.
LIMITATIONS OF REMEDIES
COADE’s entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be:
a. the replacement of any CD not meeting COADE’s “Limited Warranty” as defined
herein and which is returned to COADE or an authorized COADE dealer with a
copy of your receipt, or
b. if COADE or the dealer is unable to deliver a replacement CD which is free of
defects in materials or workmanship you may terminate this License Agreement
by returning the Licensed Program(s) and associated documentation and you will
be refunded all monies paid to COADE to acquire the Licensed Program(s).
Preface 3
PVElite - User Guide PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT
GENERAL
You may not sublicense, assign, or transfer your rights under this License Agreement or
the Licensed Program(s) except as expressly provided in this License Agreement. Any
attempt otherwise to sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations
hereunder is void and constitutes a breach of this License Agreement giving COADE the
right to terminate as specified herein. This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State
of Texas, United States of America.
The initial license fee includes 1 year of support, maintenance and enhancements to the
program. After the first 1 year term, such updates and support are optional at the then cur-
rent update fee.
Questions concerning this License Agreement, and all notices required herein, shall be
made by contacting COADE in writing at COADE, 12777 Jones RD., Ste. 480, Houston,
Texas, 77070, or by telephone, 281-890-4566.
DISCLAIMER - PVElite
Copyright(c) COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc., 2002, all rights reserved.
This proprietary software is the property of COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc.
and is provided to the user pursuant to a COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. pro-
gram license agreement containing restrictions on its use. It may not be copied or distrib-
uted in any form or medium, disclosed to third parties, or used in any manner except as
expressly permitted by the COADE/Engineering Physics Software, Inc. program license
agreement.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFT-
WARE, INC. SHALL NOT HAVE ANY LIABILITY TO THE USER IN EXCESS OF
THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID TO COADE UNDER THE COADE/ENGINEERING
PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR THIS SOFTWARE. IN
NO EVENT WILL COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS SOFTWARE, INC. BE LIABLE
TO THE USER FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL OR CONSE-
QUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE EVEN IF COADE/ENGINEERING PHYSICS, INC. HAS BEEN
Preface 4
PVElite - User Guide PVElite LICENSE AGREEMENT
Preface 5
HOOPS‘ License Grant PVElite - User Guide
6 Preface
PVElite - User Guide
&KDSWHU
,QWURGXFWLRQ
What is PVElite?
PVElite is a PC-based pressure vessel design and analysis software program developed,
marketed, and sold by COADE Engineering Software. The PVElite program is a package
of nineteen applications for the design and analysis of pressure vessels and heat exchang-
ers. The purpose of the program is to provide the vessel engineer, designer, or estimator
with easy-to-use, technically sound, well documented calculations which will speed and
simplify the task of vessel design or re-rating. The popularity of PVElite is a reflection of
COADE’s expertise in programming and engineering, as well as COADE’s dedication to
service and quality.
Introduction 1-1
What is the purpose and scope of the PVElite Program? PVElite - User Guide
• Structural load evaluation in terms of both tensile and compressive stress ratios (to the
allowable limits).
• Detailed analysis of nozzles, flanges, and base rings.
• A complete material library for all three design standards.
• A component library containing pipe diameter and wall thickness, ANSI B16.5 flange
pressure vs. temperature charts, and section properties for AISC beams.
• Printed output from the PVElite program is exceptionally clear and complete, with
user definable headings on each page. User comments and additions may be inserted
at any point in the output.
1-2 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide What distinguishes PVElite from other commercial pres-
Introduction 1-3
What Applications are Available? PVElite - User Guide
General Vessels
Wall thickness design and analysis of any vessel for realistic combinations of pressure,
deadweight, nozzle, wind and seismic loads in accordance with ASME Section VIII Divi-
sion 1 rules, Division 2 rules, and the rules of BS 5500. These calculations address mini-
mum wall thickness for pressure and allowable longitudinal stress (both tension and
compression) in the vessel wall for the expected structural load combinations.
Conical Sections
Internal and external pressure analysis of conical sections and stiffening rings. Complete
area of reinforcement and moment of inertia calculations for the cone under both internal
and external pressure are included.
Vessel Nozzles
Required wall thickness and reinforcement per the applicable code (Div. 1 or Div. 2) under
internal, and external pressures and under MAPNC conditions for nozzles in shells and
heads. The program includes tables of outside diameter and wall thickness for all nominal
pipe diameters and schedules. The program also calculates the strength of reinforcement
and evaluates failure paths for the nozzle.
Flanges
MAWP and MAP are listed for all nozzle flanges. For those flanges requiring stress analy-
sis (e.g. body flanges), complete Appendix 2 stress analysis is provided. PVElite can also
design flanges either by increasing the flange thickness or by changing several flange
parameters.
1-4 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide What Applications are Available?
Base Rings
Stress and thickness evaluation for tailing lugs, skirts and base rings. Results from both the
neutral axis shift and simplified method for basering required thickness are reported.
The following pressure vessel components, while unincorporated in the general vessel
model, may be modeled and analyzed on an individual basis in PVElite.
Lifting Lug
The stresses on legs, supporting lugs, lifting lugs, and their allowable limits can be calcu-
lated. Stresses on cap type and continuous top support rings (girder rings) can also be cal-
culated. Trunnion and shell stress as well as baseplate thickness is also computed.
TEMA Tubesheets
Analysis of all types of tubesheets using the Seventh Edition of the Standards of the Tubu-
lar Exchanger Manufacturers Association. The program takes full account of the effects of
tubesheets extended as flanges, and for fixed tubesheets also includes the effects of differ-
ential thermal expansion and the presence of an expansion joint.
ASME Tubesheets
This program determines required thickness of tubesheets for fixed or U-tube exchangers
per the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix AA.
Floating Heads
Internal and external pressure analysis of bolted dished heads (floating heads) using the
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules. An additional calculations technique allowed
by the Code (Soehren’s calculation) is also implemented by this program.
Introduction 1-5
What Applications are Available? PVElite - User Guide
Half-Pipe Jacket
This program determines required thickness and MAWP for half-pipe jacketed vessels per
the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix EE.
Large Openings
This program analyzes large openings in integral flat heads per the ASME Code Section
VIII Division 1 Appendix 2 and Appendix 14. Required thickness, MAWP and weights
are computed for geometries that have no nozzle or an attached nozzle.
Rectangular Vessels
This program analyzes non-circular pressure vessels using the rules of the ASME Code,
Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 13. Most of the vessel types in Appendix 13 are ana-
lyzed for internal pressure, including reinforced or stayed rectangular vessels with a
diametral staying plate. All membrane and bending stresses are computed and compared
to the appropriate allowables.
Nozzles
Required wall thickness and reinforcement under internal pressure for nozzles in shells
and heads, using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules and including tables of
outside diameter and wall thickness for all nominal pipe diameters and schedules. The
program also calculates the strength of reinforcement and evaluates failure paths for the
nozzle.
Flanges
Stress analysis and geometry selection for all types of flanges using the ASME Code, Sec-
tion VIII, Division 1 rules. This program both designs and analyzes the following types of
flanges:
• Weld neck flanges and all integral flange types
• Slip on flanges and all loose flange types with hubs
• Ring type flanges and all loose flange types without hubs
• Blind flanges, both circular and non-circular
• TEMA channel covers
• Reverse geometry weld neck flanges
• Flat faced flanges with full face gaskets
Horizontal Vessels
Stress analysis of horizontal drums on saddle supports using the method of L.P. Zick.
Results include stresses at the saddles, the midpoint of the vessel, and in the heads. Stiffen-
ing rings used in the design of the vessel are also evaluated. Wind and seismic loadings are
1-6 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide What Applications are Available?
also considered. Additionally, the saddle, webs and baseplate are checked for external
seismic and wind loads.
WRC 107
Stresses in cylindrical or spherical shells due to loading on an attachment, using the
method of P.P. Bijlaard as defined in Welding Research Council Bulletin 107, including a
stress comparison to VIII div. 2 allowables for 3 different loading conditions. An FEA
interface to PRG’s NOZPRO is also included.
Summary
Description and evaluation of all the components of a pressure vessel or heat exchanger.
Design pressure, temperature, material, actual thickness, and Maximum Allowable Work-
ing Pressure are shown for each component.
WRC 297
Stresses in cylindrical shells and nozzles due to external loading, per Welding Research
Council Bulletin 297 and PD5500 Annex G.
Appendix Y Flanges
Required thickness and MAWP for Class 1 flanges with metal to metal contact outside the
bolt circle per Appendix Y.
Introduction 1-7
About the PVElite Documentation PVElite - User Guide
1-8 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide Program Support / User Assistance
Introduction 1-9
Updates PVElite - User Guide
Updates
PVElite update sets are identified by their version number. The current release of PVElite
is Version 4.2.
Licenses
There are 3 types of PVElite licenses:
Full Run
Provides unlimited access to PVElite and one year of updates, maintenance, and support.
Updates, maintenance, and support are available on an annual basis after the first year.
Lease
Provides unlimited access to PVElite with updates, maintenance, and support provided as
long as the lease is in effect.
Limited Run
Provides 50 analyses over an unlimited period of time, but does not include program
updates. The user is upgraded (if necessary) whenever a new set of 50 “runs” is purchased.
A run is decremented when the “Analyze” Option is selected from the menu bar and the
“Analyze” submenu item is selected.
1-10 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide Summary of Version 3.5 Improvements
Introduction 1-11
Summary of PVElite Version 4.00 Improvements PVElite - User Guide
1-12 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide Summary of Version 4.2 Improvements
Introduction 1-13
PV Elite Component Analysis New Features Version 4.2 PVElite - User Guide
1-14 Introduction
PVElite - User Guide
&KDSWHU
Overview of the Installation/
Configuration Process
The PVElite program is installed on the system hard disk using the program setup
located on the CD. This installation program has been designed to allow total or par-
tial installations, diagnostic checks of the installation, multi-language support, and
ease of updating. This section will explain the process of running the PVElite setup
application.
For users upgrading to a new version of PVElite, the installation program can be
instructed to place the new files in the same directory where the current version
resides. The new version files will overwrite the old version files where appropriate.
The PVElite program can be run from anywhere on the system hard disk. It is recom-
mended that job files be kept in one or more data or project directories separate from
the PVElite installation directory.
The installation process consists of the following steps:
1. Copying files from the CD to the hard disk.
2. Extraction of the PVElite program from these compressed files.
3. Verification of the extracted files.
4. Installation of the External Software Lock drivers
5. Configuring the PVElite program.
Note PVElite is designed for 800x600 resolution (using small fonts) or 1024x768
resolution (using large fonts).
The ESL can be easily attached to the parallel port of the computer in a matter of seconds.
The printer cable should then be attached to the other side of the ESL. The essential
requirement for the successful operation of the ESL is that the port must be a Centronics
compatible DB-25 pin parallel port. This is the IBM PC standard read/write printer port.
The ESL contains the PVElite licensing data, and other client-specific information. This
information includes the client company name and user ID number. Additional data may
be stored on the ESL depending on the specific program and the specific client.
Control Panel
This brings up the Add/Remove Programs dialog box. Click on the Install button to start
the installation process.
The next screen prompts the user for the folder in which PVElite is to be installed. This
folder may be entered by selecting the Browse button. The folder may be the current loca-
tion of an existing PVElite installation, or a new location.
This starts the installation process by prompting you to place the CD in the CD-ROM
drive and clicking on the Next button. The Add/Remove Programs application searches
for the SETUP.EXE file located on the CD and prompts the user for verification of the file
to be installed. Clicking the Finish button runs the PVElite setup program.
Installing PVElite
The PVElite installation routine is easily navigable by responding to on-screen prompts
and then clicking the Next button. After an opening screen, the user must enter the Serial
Number provided with the CD. This serial number should be kept in a safe place for
future installations.
Note The serial number is located on the sticker that is attached to the CD. Do not dis-
card the jewel case!
The next screen prompts the user for the folder in which PVElite is to be installed. This
folder may be entered by selecting the Browse button. The folder may be the current loca-
tion of an existing PVElite installation or a new location.
The program then prompts for the folder in which to add the program icons.
The user then specifies the color of the ESL being used. This ensures that the correct driv-
ers get loaded during the installation.
ESL Selection
Note After loading the ESL drivers, the computer will have to be rebooted in order for
them to become operative.
Note The SYSTEM subdirectory is not the primary top level SYSTEM directory con-
taining the network operating system.
Once the software has been installed on the network drive, the installation program
invokes the configuration program which generates a default configuration file. Once the
installation directory is write protected this file cannot be modified. Leaving this file as
read only would insure the configuration file can then only be used as a starting template
to generate other configuration files located in the various user data directories.
can be found in the subdirectory ASSIDRV beneath the PVElite program directory. The
documentation files in this subdirectory contain instructions for a variety of networks and
operating systems.
Note Whenever a new version of PVElite is installed in a network environment the new
ESL drivers must be installed on the machine where the red key resides.
LOAD HASPSERV
This modification can be accomplished with SYSCON (or equivalent) assuming Supervi-
sor rights.
HASPSERV
in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file of the workstation, after the commands which load the net-
work drivers. The workstation does not need to be logged in. Note however, the worksta-
tion must always be up and running for users to access the software.
licenses are on the ESL, a user must then be logged into the network to access the soft-
ware. A few local ESLs provide much greater operating flexibility.
Note The number of licenses assigned to a network ESL is not a parameter that can be
modified remotely by COADE software.
Local users running the software from a network drive should run the file "Netuser.bct"
one time to update all locations.
&KDSWHU
Tutorial / Master Menu
position and orientation of the current element, and quick internal pressure calculations for
the current element.
How are the menu selections made, how are the buttons pushed, how is the data entered?
Most operations are obvious when using a mouse; simply point to the item and click the
left mouse button1 to open drop down menus from the menu line, activate the button com-
mands, pick a tool or move control to one of the screen areas. All buttons and toolbars
have fly-out definitions which are activated when the mouse rests on the button.
When a mouse click occurs in the data area(s), the Tab key moves the highlight (and con-
trol) through its input cells. In most element data areas, the Enter key has no function; it is
the tab key which moves the cursor to the next input cell. The exception is at “combo
boxes”2 where a click on the arrow will display the available choices and a down arrow
will step through the choices. An example of the combo box is found on the Input screen
shown above where the element is chosen from a list of available types. Throughout the
program, the [F1] key shows the help screen for the highlighted data item. Once familiar
with these screen controls, a combination of mouse and keystroke commands will provide
the most efficient navigation through the program.
Note The right mouse button is used to select vessel details on the vessel graphic.
Note Combo boxes have the down arrow button at the right end of the input cell.
Main Menu
Status Bar
When the graphics area of the Input screen is active a few more keys are available. No
special highlight will appear but the string “PgUp/PgDn/Home/End” will appear at the
bottom graphics area. This indicates these keys are now active. The image in the graphics
area shows the current state of the input for the vessel model with its elements and the
details on these elements. One element is highlighted. This is the current element and the
element data (Element Basic Data and Element Additional Data) shown on the screen
defines this element. By pressing PgUp or PgDn, the highlight changes from one element
to the next through the vessel. Home and End keys are pressed to move the highlight to the
first and last elements in the vessel. Clicking the left mouse button on the element will also
highlight it. Once an element is highlighted the detail information for that element may be
accessed. With the mouse, simply click the right mouse button for the existing detail
image to be displayed. To add details to the current element, simply click on the appropri-
ate detail on the toolbar and provide the necessary data.
Once the control of this screen is understood, all the remaining input processors will
present no difficulties as they all have the same control structure with mouse and keyboard
commands.
Input Menu
Other than the Vessel Data there are four other categories of vessel input which must be
addressed - component analysis data, report headings, the guidelines for the vessel design
Enter
or analysis, and a definition of the live (wind and seismic) loads. These input processors
Vessel Data
are entered through Input on the Main Menu. The drop down menu here can be used to
switch between the Build and Define mode and also enter the Heading definition and the
Global processor. The Design/Analysis Constraints are important here as this is where the
overall analysis for this vessel is defined and controlled.
Finished thickness is required input for each vessel element but the user may allow the
program to increase element thickness so that each element passes the requirements for
internal pressure, external pressure, and the combined loads of pressure, dead and live
loads. Remember that the status bar lists internal pressure information about the current
element including the required thickness. A switch is also available to locate stiffener
rings on the vessel to satisfy the external pressure requirements.
The Component Analysis Data option allows the user to enter data and analyze without
building a vessel. These are COADE’s remaining CodeCalc analysis modules some of
which cannot be incorporated directly in PVElite. CodeCalc, COADE’s popular vessel
component analysis package is included in PVElite.
Component
Analysis
Processor
Report
Headings Report Headings screen:
Design/
Analysis
Constraints
Enter Live
Load Data
Error Checking
The input processor makes many data consistency checks during the input session. For
example, the processor will create an error message if the user tries to specify a nozzle 20
feet from the bottom of a 10 foot shell element. Not all pieces of data can be confirmed on
input. For that reason, a general error processor is executed prior to the analysis. This error
processor can be run in a stand-alone mode as well. The error checker may be accessed
from the pull down menu under Analyze. In addition to the notes that are presented on the
screen during error checking, these error messages also appear in the output report acces-
sible through the output review processor.
Analysis
PVElite can be used to confirm a safe design for a proposed or existing vessel. The pro-
gram also provides direct design capabilities in which the wall thickness of individual ele-
ments are increased to meet the code requirements for internal and external pressure and
longitudinal stress from a variety of dead and live loads. Whether or not the program
changes wall thickness during the analysis is controlled through a Design/Analysis Con-
straint specification under Design Modification. (See Design/Analysis Constraints screen
above). A simple analysis run (no design) occurs when the flags for “Select t for ...” are all
unchecked. If any of these boxes are checked, the program will automatically step up the
wall thickness until the constraint is satisfied. The user’s input in the resulting output
report is automatically updated to reflect any changes made during the analysis. In addi-
tion to wall thickness, a fourth flag can be set - “Set Stiffener Rings?”. In this case, rather
than increasing the wall thickness, stiffener rings are located along the vessel to satisfy the
external pressure requirements. As with the wall thickness changes, these stiffener rings
are added to the model input for this analysis.
PVElite will analyze each element to determine the required wall thickness for internal
and external pressure based on the Section VIII Division 1 rules, Division 2 rules or
PD:5500 rules. The program then calculates the longitudinal stresses in the wall due to
four categories of vessel loads: pressure, deadweight, deadweight moments from vessel
attachments or applied loads, and moments due to the live loads - wind and earthquake.
These four categories are set for three different load conditions: empty, operating, and
hydrotest. The sensible combination of these various categories and conditions produce
the default set of 12 load cases that are found in the Design/Analysis Contraints processor.
For each load case, PVElite will calculate the maximum longitudinal stress around the cir-
cumference of the elements and compare these values to the allowable stress for the mate-
rial, both tensile and compressive. If stresses in the vessel wall exceed the design limits,
PVElite will proceed according to the design modification settings in the input.
Once the program finishes a pass through the analysis, a check is made for any program
design modifications. If any data was changed by the program, PVElite automatically re-
runs the complete analysis to review the impact of the changes.
There are several additional analysis controls that should be reviewed here. These con-
trols, however, are more general in nature and are not defined for the individual job.
Instead, these seven computational control directives are set for all jobs executed in the
Data subdirectory. These controls are viewed and modified through the Tools item on the
Main Menu. Here, select Configuration to display the setup parameters dialogue.
Tools Menu
WRC 107 Input Screen (by clicking on WRC 107 in Component Pulldown Menu):
Main Menu
PVElite always starts with the Vessel Data Input Screen. Across the top of this screen is a
line of items which is called the Main Menu. The Main Menu controls the major functions
of the program. This chapter reviews the functions available in each of these menu items.
The PVElite Vessel Data screen has the following structure:
Main Menu
Status Bar
The items in the Main Menu, File, Input, Analyze, Output, Tools, Diagnostics, View, ESL,
and Help, may be selected with a mouse click or by pressing the underlined character
while pressing the [Alt] key. For example, the Output processor may be selected by press-
ing [Alt]+ [O].
File Menu
File Menu
The File options control the general operations of PVElite files. Options that are displayed
in the menu with an ellipsis (…) cause a file manage window to appear when selected. The
file manager is described in the chapter titled Miscellaneous Processors. The following
options are available from the Main Menu item - File:
New
• New - Starts a new file.
Open
Save Dialog
• Save As—Allows the user to either save a file that has not been named or to save the
current file under another name.
Print • Print—Sends the current vessel graphic image directly to a printer.
• Print Preview—Displays the page that will be sent to the printer (see above)
• Print Setup—Brings up the standard Windows printer setup screen.
• Exit—Allows the user to exit PVElite. A message window will appear to give the user
a last opportunity to save any modification to the current job.
• Export
• Dump Graphics to PCX...—Rather than sending the vessel image directly to
the printer, the image may be stored in a standard PCX format file. This file
can be printed at a later time or added to other documents. The name of the
created PCX file will default to the name of the current job with the extension
of PCX, e.g. JOBNAME.PCX.
• Dump Screen to PCX...—As with “Dump Graphics to PCX File...,” this
option will build a PCX file for later manipulation and printing. In this case,
the entire contents of the screen are saved in the file.
3-18 Tutorial / Master Menu
PVElite - User Guide File Menu
Input Menu
Input Menu
The Input options controls the general operations of PVElite program input processes. The
following options are available:
Enter
• Vessel Data—This is the main input processor of the program, which allows the user
Vessel Data
to input and edit the element data (shell, heads, body flange, skirt and cone) and the
detail data (saddle, platform, packing, liquid, insulation, lining, ring, nozzle, tray, leg,
lug, weight, force and moment). Also in this option the user can add, delete, insert ele-
ments and details. The user can click on an element’s graphic field to bring this ele-
ment’s data to the screen for further editing. The user can right click on an element for
further editing. The ‘Individual Detail’ button on the Detail toolbar also allows the
user to edit the detail data. This processor is discussed later in this section. See the
Component
Element Data and the Detail Data chapters for more information.
Analysis
Processor • Component Analysis Data—This option includes those (CodeCalc) processors which
are not integrated into the main vessel analysis. These processors are described in
Chapters 9 thorough 28.
Report
• Report Headings—This option allows the user to input and edit a three line heading,
Headings
which will be placed in the first three lines of each report page. It will also print on the
title page, which will be the first page of the report.
• Design/Analysis Constraints—This option allows the user to input and edit the global
Design/ data, which includes the general vessel description, design control data, and the struc-
Analysis tural load analyses to be performed. This is where ASME Section VIII Division 1,
Constraints
Division 2, or PD:5500 is specified as the design code. If the user does not select this
option, the program will set the default data.
Analyze Menu
Analyze Menu
The Analyze options cause program to quit the input process and enter the analysis pro-
cess. PVElite will first save the current job to the input file with the same filename, then
process the analysis. The following options are available:
• Analyze—This option quits the input process and begins the error checking process.
After finishing the error checking, if no error is detected, the program will implement
the analysis process. A description of the PVElite analysis is found in Chapter 7 of this
user’s guide. The output from the analysis processor, whether error messages or
results, may be examined by the Review function in Output. Once an analysis is com-
pleted, the program will automatically switch to the Review processor.
• Error Check Only—This option will only process the error checking, and will not
implement the analysis process. The error report may be examined in the Review
option found in the Output item from this Main Menu.
Output Menu
Output Menu
The Output options allow the user to review the analysis results, and print the graphics of
the vessel. The following options are available under Output:
• Review—This option allows the user to review the analysis results of the current job,
if these results are already available.
• Review the DXF file.
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
The Tools options control utility processors. Options that are displayed in the menu with
‘...’ cause a window to appear when selected. The configuration option allows the user to
define a variety of system variables for the program:
Configuration Menu
The Configuration Option lets some specific program computation control parameters be
set. These controls let you set some options in some programs that control the results of
some computations. Following is a description of the options:
Print Water Volume in Gallons?
Normally the volumes computed by the program are in diameter units.
If you want to use US gallons instead of cubic diameter units check this directive. The pro-
gram will use cubic units if the default value if it is not checked.
the required thickness of the blind flange cover. Please note that this can only be used if
there is only 1 nozzle located in the blind flange.
Use EigenSolver
The natural frequency of a structure can be calculated using more than 1 method. The tra-
ditional method is to use the analysis technique of Freese or Rayleigh-Ritz. For the skirt
supported freestanding structure, this method provides acceptable results. When the sup-
port configuration is not the skirt/base type such as legs, lugs, or intermediate skirt, this
analysis may not provide accurate results.
To solve this problem generically, PVElite has a natural frequency solver that uses numer-
ical methods to solve the general equations motion. Namely, the program must solve the
following: [ [K] - Z 2[M]] {a}={0}. Which for the general case is a set of n homogenous
(right hand side equal to zero, in this case abs[ [K] - Z 2[M]] {a}=0. This requires an iter-
ative solution.
After building a stiffness [K] and mass [M] matrix of the model with appropriate bound-
ary conditions (anchors at skirts, bottom of legs, at support lugs etc.) the program can
extract a number of modes that is meaningful in the solution of the dynamics problem,
particularly the modal response spectrum analysis. Using this generic frequency Eigenso-
lution method, PVElite can accurately extract modes of vibration for models that do not fit
neatly into the cantilever beam model required for the Freese integration codes. The natu-
ral frequency of the vessel is used in several of the wind and seismic method. For PVElite
files earlier than 4.3, the default is to use the Freese method. The default version for 4.3
and later is to use the EigenSolver. Check or uncheck this box as necessary.
Edit/Add Materials—This option allows the user to create and edit a user defined material
in the program’s material database. The screen appears as follows:
Tutorial / Master Menu 3-27
Tools Menu PVElite - User Guide
To use this processor, fill in all of the values in all cells. If more than one material is to be
entered, use the Next button to enter the new material. After all materials have been
entered, save the file with the Save button. Finally, press the Merge key to join the user
defined material database with the supplied material database.
• Calculator—This option allows the user to perform simple calculations and paste the
results in the input field in which the cursor resides.
Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics Menu
• Crc Check—This option performs a cyclic redundancy check on each of the supplied
PVElite files.
• Build Version Check—This option checks the revision level of the PVElite execut-
able files.
View Menu
View Menu
The View Option allows the user to specify the toolbars to be displayed. The following
options are available:
• Standard Bar—
• Element Bar—PVElite allows the user to create a vessel with the default data by sim-
ply clicking an icon on the Element Toolbar. The following options are available:
• Cylinder—Causes a cylindrical shell to be added to the end of the vessel under con-
struction.
• Ellipse—Adds an elliptical head to the end of the vessel.
• Torisphere—Adds a torispherical head to the end of the vessel.
• Sphere—Adds a spherical head to the end of the vessel.
• Cone—Adds a conical head or shell element to the end of the vessel.
• Welded Flat—Adds a flat head to the end of the vessel.
• Body Flange—Adds a body flange to the end of the vessel.
• Skirt—Skirt element with optional Basering.
• Detail Bar—By clicking an icon on the Detail toolbar, certain details such as stiffen-
ers, nozzles, forces, moments, platforms, liquid, lining, etc. can be added to the cur-
rent element when applicable.
• Utility Bar—
The list dialog allows the editing of some types of vessel details. One fea-
ture of the list is that the location of the detail can be specified from the
datum position. To use the list dialog, select the type of detail to edit by
pressing its tab. Then simply enter the data as necessary for each cell. If
the list is empty, then press the plus button (+) to add a row.
The entry of the “From Node” is optional. The program will assign that
value automatically. The description is a required mandatory input. If it is
not entered, the program will treat that row as if it did not exist and that
data will be lost. All of the other data must be entered as required.
Rows of data can be duplicated from on row to the next. Click on the list-
ing number of the item to copy. That row should turn black (selected).
Next copy the data to the clipboard by pressing [ctrl-c]. Next paste it to a
blank line by using [ctrl-v]. Next change any data that might be different
for that detail.
• PVElite 3D Viewer—Pressing this button starts the PVElite 3D viewer.
• Status Bar—
• Split—Allows the user to split the screen by moving the line left or right.
• Input Bar—Allows selection of the various options as described earlier in this chapter.
• Analyze Bar—Allows the user to analyze the current model, review previous results,
error-check the model, or review the previously created DXF file.
then be pasted into an application such as Microsoft Word. If this option is used,
we suggest changing the background color to white instead of the default back-
ground color of black.
Print Print—Print the graphic image
Reset View—Put the model back into its original location when the program
Reset View
started
Front Predefined Views—Clicking one of these buttons changes the current view to
Zoom
front, back, top, bottom, left, or right view.
Extents Zoom Extents—Resizes the model so that it fits in the current window.
Zoom Zoom Window—When this operator is selected, use the mouse to draw a window
Window around the portion of the model that you want to zoom in on. This is a rubber band
zoom. Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.
Rotate
Rotate—This operator allows the model to be rotated using the mouse. Click the
Pan right mouse button and move the mouse to rotate the model.
Pan—The pan operator allows the model to be translated in the direction the
Zoom mouse is being dragged. Pressing the mouse wheel and holding it down while
Camera moving the mouse will also pan the model.
Zoom Camera—This operator zooms in or out. Press this button then press the left
Select by
Window mouse button and move the mouse diagonally across the screen to zoom in or out.
Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.
Select by Window—This is a rubber band selection of objects. Once objects are
selected they can be translated and rotated.
Select by
Click Select by Click—Allows the selection of objects by group for further manipula-
tion. This is the cursor icon. Use ctrl + click to select more than one object.
Insert Insert Cutting Plane—Click on this button and then click anywhere in the window.
Cutting
Plane
A cutting plane will then appear. The plane can then be rotated after it has been
selected with the selection tool (cursor icon). The rotating grid will then expose the
various layers of the vessel. The visibility of the cutting plane can then be turned
Translate off once the view is set.
Selection
Translate Selection—Moves the items in the current selection away from the main
Rotate model.
Selection Rotate Selection—Rotates the current selection in its own 3D space.
Insert Text Insert Text—Add comments to the model. These comments are for the session
only and will not be saved. However, if the graphic is printed, the comments will
be printed out as well.
Edit
Edit Properties—This option allows visibility of vessel details to be turned on or
Properties
off. Additionally, the model colors can also be set here. After being set, the pro-
gram will remember them in between sessions. This option is also available by
right clicking on the model window and selecting properties. The properties dialog
is shown below:
You can also add an elements transparency attribute by clicking the Change This Item’s
Color button and checking the transparency option on the color dialog.
The floating toolbar show in the window above is produced by right clicking in the win-
dow. These menus allow the model to be manipulated. Here it is seen that the grid used to
slice the model has been turned off. Within this menu structure it is possible to change the
shading algorithm, alter the appearance of surfaces and to change the selection level of
various entities. The Options command brings up the Options (Properties) dialog.
Here some of the internals have been selected and translated out of the model. The viewer
is a very powerful and useful processor. One of the greatest benefits is its ability to show
interference between vessel details like rings, nozzles, platforms, and others.
This is a wire frame view of the 3D model. This option is available under the Render
Mode option. After viewing the model close the 3D viewer to return to PVElite.
ESL Menu
ESL Menu
The ESL Menu gives access to utilities which interact with the External Software Lock.
The options are as follows:
• Show Data—This option will display the data stored on the ESL.
• Phone Update—This option will allow the user to obtain phone update authorization
information or other ESL changes, to be made over the phone.
• Generate Fax Codes—This option will provide the user with access codes for remote
ESL updating. These access codes should be sent to COADE for authorization codes.
• Enter Fax Authorization Codes—Choose this option to enter the remote authorization
codes you received from COADE. Each set of four codes will make one change to the
data stored on your ESL
Help Menu
Help Menu
The Help Menu displays on-line help and information on how to obtain technical support
for PVElite. The options available are as follows:
• Tip of the Day—Provides tips for running PVElite.
• Help Topics—Starts the help facility.
• About PVElite—Provides information on the best ways to contact COADE personnel
for technical support, and provides a link to COADE’s Web Site.
• Online Registration—Register this product electronically with COADE.
• Online Documentation—View this manual online.
• Foundation 3D Help—Review the foundation 3D interface specification.
• Torispherical head
• Spherical head
• Cone
• Welded Flat head
• Body flange
• Skirt
If the vessel begins with a skirt element it will be a vertical vessel. Both vertical vessels on
legs and horizontal vessels would start with a head element. If that first head element is
improperly oriented for the vessel in mind (horizontal or vertical), simple click on the
FLIP button to correct the orientation. Once the second element is added, the vessel can no
longer be flipped between horizontal and vertical. Later, if heads, body flanges or cone
elements show incorrect orientation, use the FLIP button to fix them. From Nodes and To
Nodes are automatically assigned by the program; they start with node 10 and are incre-
mented by 10’s throughout the model. The element data set at the beginning of the session
carries forward from one element to the next. Any data changes on the last element will
carry forward onto any new elements to be added. The element data displayed belongs to
the highlighted element in the vessel image. Use the mouse to change the highlighted and
displayed element by clicking on the element of interest. The Page Up and Page Down
keys can also be used to scroll through the vessel elements.
Data may be updated one element at a time but there are more efficient ways to change an
item through several elements. Say, for example, the circumferential weld joint efficiency
for the skirt (from node 10 to 20) is set at 0.7. If this value was not changed to 1.0 on the
bottom head as it was created, this (incorrect) value is carried from one element to the next
in the Build Mode to the top of the vessel element (say, From Node 50 To Node 60). In this
situation, it is easiest to change the data on the bottom head element (20 to 30) and then
use the SHARE button to “share” this item through the elements in the list with “From
Node” 30 through “From Node” 50. Certain data is automatically “shared”. Inside diame-
ter, for example is automatically changed for all elements (stopping at cones) attached to
the element where the change occurs. Some changes to the element data do not immedi-
ately appear on the vessel image. To refresh the image click on the Update button.
Adding Details
With the elements defined, enough information exists to run through the pressure calcula-
tions but the total vessel weight is not yet set. Much of this information is specified as ele-
ment details. Nozzles, insulation, operating fluid, platforms and the like are all entered as
details on the various elements. PVElite will calculate the weight of each of these items
and account for them in the various analyses. Details such as saddles, lugs and legs are
also used to locate support points on the vessel—important data for load calculations.
Details can only be specified on the current element. To enter the first detail, highlight
(make current) the element which will hold the detail and click on the appropriate
DETAIL button. Allowing the cursor to rest on the Tool Bar Button will produce a fly out
definition of the button. Select the detail and enter the data in the screen that follows. Use
the Help button on the detail screen or press [F1] to learn more about the requested data.
Define all details necessary to develop the proper total vessel load.
Help Screen ([F1]) for a Nozzle Detail:
Graphics dumped to a PCX file, inserted into this document, and scaled:
Screen dumped to a PCX file, inserted into this document, and scaled:
Note These pressure calculations should not be confused with those used for the wall
thickness requirements defined in ASME Section VIII and PD:5500. Here, inter-
nal and hydrostatic pressures are used to calculate a longitudinal, tensile stress in
the vessel wall and the external pressure a similar compressive stress in the wall.
The fourth area, Nozzle Design Modification, is used to set the overall pressure require-
ments for the nozzles on this vessel and also to include the maximum allowable pressure -
new and cold (MAP nc) case in the nozzle checks. There is also a button on this screen -
Install Option. Clicking on this button will produce a screen which allows the user to spec-
ify where certain vessel details will be added - either at the fabrication shop or in the field.
This data is used to properly set the detail weights for the empty and operating conditions.
VO - Vortex Shedding
Operating
VE - Vortex Shedding
Empty
Wind and earthquake information is supplied through the Live Load Data Screen. PVElite
generates the live loads based on the criteria established by one of four standards - the
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASC), the Uniform Building Code (UBC), the
(Canadian) National Building Code (NBC), and the Indian National Standard. Wind loads
may also be specified directly by the user as a wind pressure profile. PVElite references
these codes for live loads only. The ASME Section VIII or PD 5500 rules apply for all
other calculations. The screen below shows the data required for the default codes.
PVElite will use these criteria to set the magnitude of the live load and bending moment
on each element of the vessel.
Live Load Data Screen:
Once the element, detail, and global data is entered and checked, the model is ready for
error processing and analysis.
Shell / Head:
&KDSWHU
Element Data
PVElite has eight basic element types from which all vessels are constructed. PVElite
terms for these elements are as follows:
• Cylindrical Cylindrical Shell
• Elliptical Elliptical Head
• Torispherical Torispherical Head
• Spherical Spherical Head or Shell
• Conical Conical Head or Shell Segment
• Welded Flat Welded Flat Head
• Flange Body Flange
• Skirt Skirt Support with Basering
PVElite does not require the complete construction of a vessel for the analysis. Individual
elements or groups of elements may be defined and at least partially analyzed. Only com-
plete vessels, that is, vessels with proper supports, can be analyzed for deadweight and
live loads.
Except for the skirt element, all elements can be used to create either horizontal or vertical
vessels. Models for vertical vessels are built from bottom to top and models for horizontal
vessels are built from left to right. The vessel orientation is established with the first ele-
ment. If starting with a skirt, it’s a vertical vessel. If starting with a head, the head may be
“flipped” between a bottom head (vertical model) and a left head (horizontal model) by
clicking on the FLIP button. Once the second element is added to the model, the orienta-
tion is fixed. Skirts are the only vessel support that are modelled as elements. Other sup-
ports such as legs and lugs for vertical vessels and saddles for horizontal vessels are
modelled as “details” on the elements. These vessel details are in the next chapter.
The ‘From’ node number for this element will also be used to define details such as noz-
zles, insulation, and packing which are associated with this element. The location of the
‘To’ node will be calculated by the program by adding the length of this element to the
location of the ‘From’ node. The From and To nodes establish the overall organization of
the vessel.
When creating a vessel model in the BUILD mode, node numbers are automatically
assigned to each element. The BUILD mode starts with node 10 and increments by 10
throughout the vessel. When DELETEing elements, the program will “reconnect” the ves-
sel elements by changing the From node of the following element to the To node of the
previous element. When INSERTing elements, PVElite will ask for the new (added) To
node number and again “reconnect” the elements so that the From and To nodes match
with the previous and next elements in the model.
The program defines a vertical vessel from the bottom to the top. If the vertical vessel is
on a skirt, the first element would be the skirt. If it is on legs or lugs, the first element
would be a head and the legs or lugs are defined as details on the appropriate shell ele-
ment.
The program defines a horizontal vessel from the left end to the right end. The first ele-
ment in a horizontal vessel is usually a head, and the support saddles are defined as details
on the appropriate shell element.
Element’s To Node
Enter the number associated with the starting point of this element, the ‘From’ node.
Inside Diameter
Enter the inside diameter of the element.
• For elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads, this should be the inside diameter of
the straight flange.
• For cones, this is the inside diameter at the From node end.
• For flanges, this is the inside diameter of the body flange.
• For skirts, this is the inside diameter at the top of the skirt.
Distance
Enter the distance between the ‘From’ Node and ‘To’ Node.
• For a cylindrical shell, enter the length of the shell from seam to seam.
• For an elliptical, torispherical, or spherical head, enter the length of the straight flange.
The straight flange length cannot equal zero.
• For a conical head or shell segment, enter the length of the cone (including toriconical
sections, if any) from seam to seam.
• For a welded flat head, enter the thickness of the head.
• For a body flange, enter the through thickness of the flange including the weld neck, if
any.
• For a skirt support, enter the distance from the bottom of the basering to the skirt/head/
shell seam.
Finished Thickness
Enter the finished thickness of the element. This is typically the nominal thickness minus
any mill undertolerance, and taking into account any thinning due to forming. Note that
the corrosion allowance is automatically subtracted from this thickness by the program
and should not be subtracted by the user.
• For elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads, you may have to reduce the nominal
thickness of the plate used in order to take into account the thinning of the head due to
forming.
• For cylindrical shells made from pipe, you will have to subtract the maximum possible
mill undertolerance from nominal pipe wall thickness.
• For welded flat heads, enter the through thickness of the flange portion, but do not
include the hub and weld neck.
• For a skirt, this is typically the nominal thickness minus any mill undertolerance, and
taking into account any thinning due to forming. For cylindrical skirts made from
pipe, you will have to subtract the maximum possible mill undertolerance from the
nominal pipe wall thickness.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The analysis program will subtract this value from the
entered thickness and add this value to inside diameter.
Material Name
Enter the material specification as it appears in the material allowable tables. Alterna-
tively, the material can be selected from the material database by selecting the [Mat] but-
ton from the toolbar. Selecting one of the material names from the list will display the
significant material parameters for the analysis. If the current element temperature is out-
side the valid temperature range for the material, the material may not be specified or
selected. (Likewise, a temperature may not be entered if it exceeds the limits for the mate-
rial.)
Pressing Enter while on this field will display the material properties of the current ele-
ment or detail. Note that if the material is newly selected, the data displayed here are
directly from the program’s material database, otherwise the data are from the data struc-
ture of the current element or detail. If a newly selected material can not be found in the
program’s material database, the program will assume that it is a “User-defined material”,
in this case the user must define all material properties in this window.
stress reduction which my be entered as a joint efficiency. Please be sure to refer to Sec-
tion VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12 for help in determining this value.
The Joint Efficiency in this (and all other) ASME Code formulas is a measure of the
inspection quality on the weld seam. In general, weld seams that receive full radiography
have a joint efficiency of 1.0. Weld seams that receive spot radiography have a joint effi-
ciency of 0.85. Weld seams that receive no radiography have a joint efficiency of 0.7.
Seamless components have a joint efficiency of 1.0.
In addition to the basic rules described above, the Code requires that no two seams in the
same vessel differ in joint efficiency by more than one category of radiography. For exam-
ple, if circumferential seams receive no radiography (E=0.7) then longitudinal seams have
a maximum E of 0.85, even if they receive full radiography. The practical effect of this
rule is circumferential seams, which are usually less highly stressed may be spot radio-
graphed (E=0.85) while longitudinal seams are fully radiographed. This results in the
same metal thickness at some savings in inspection costs.
Except for the skirt, these values should be set to 1.0 for PD:5500 and Division II.
Cylindrical Shell
There is no additional data for cylinders.
Elliptical Head
Head Factor
Enter the aspect ratio for the elliptical head. A value of 2 is typical, that is, the major axis
(vessel diameter) is twice the minor axis (two times the head height). For example, a 60
inch diameter elliptical head would extend 15 inches beyond the straight flange.
Torispherical Head
Crown Radius
Enter the crown radius of the torispherical head. For a standard ASME Flanged and
Dished head, this is equal to the outside diameter of the shell. See the ASME Code, Sec-
tion VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-4, figure 1-4(b). The crown radius is ‘L’ in this figure.
For PD:5500, this is equal to the outside diameter of crown section of torispherical end
measured to tangent between crown and knuckle, as shown in Figure 3.5.2.1.
Knuckle Radius
Enter the knuckle radius for the toroidal portion of the torispherical head. For a standard
ASME Flanged and Dished head, this is equal to 6 percent of the crown radius. Allowable
values range from 6 percent of the crown radius to 100 percent of the crown radius (hemi-
spherical head). See the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-4, figure 1-
4(b). The knuckle radius is r’ in this figure.
Spherical Head
There is no additional data for spherical heads.
To Node Diameter
The diameter entered in the Element Basic Data for a cone is the inside diameter of the
cone at the ‘From’ end of the cone. Enter the inside diameter of the cone at the ‘To’ end
here. For a conical head, either the ‘From’ node or ‘To’ node will have a diameter equal to
zero or two times the small end knuckle radius.
Note that this should not be the diameter at the point where a knuckle or flare intersects the
conical section, but at the point where the knuckle or flare intersects the cylindrical sec-
tion.
Cone Length
Enter the design length of the cone along the axis of the vessel. The program will calculate
the effective length of the cone for internal and external pressure calculations.
Note that for cones without a knuckle or flared section, you can enter either the half apex
angle, or the design length of the cone. If you enter both, the program will check the given
angle against the calculated angle. For cases where there is a knuckle or a flare, you must
enter both the length and the angle.
For internal pressure calculations the half apex angle should not be greater than 30
degrees, though the program will give results for up to 60 degrees. For external pressure
calculations it must not be greater than 60 degrees.
Note that for cones without a knuckle or flared section, you can enter either the half apex
angle, or the design length of the cone. If you enter both, the program will check the given
angle against the calculated angle.
Toriconical
Check this field if this cone has either a flare (at the small end) or a knuckle (at the large
end). See ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph UG-33, Figure UG-33.1 for an
illustration of a toriconical section. By checking the field, the Cone Knuckle Data Edit
window will appear.
Toricone Dialog
The Toricone Dialog lets the user input and edit the data of the knuckles which are parts of
a cone component. The following options are available:
• DELETE - Resets the input fields to values of 0.
• OK - Saves the data then closes the window.
• CANCEL - Exits the window without saving the data.
• HELP - Displays the button definitions.
Attachment Factor
Enter the flat head attachment factor, calculated or selected from either the ASME Code,
Section VIII, Division 1, or the British Standard PD:5500. For PD:5500, enter the factor C
computed per figures 3.5.5(1-2). Typical values are 0.35 or 0.41. For ASME Code, refer to
Paragraph UG-34, Figure UG-34. Some typical attachment factors are as follows:
0.17 (b-1) Head welded to vessel with generous radius
0.20 (b-2) Head welded to vessel with small radius
0.20 (c) Lap welded or brazed construction
0.13 (d) Integral flat circular heads
0.20 (e f g) Plate welded inside vessel (check 0.33*m)
0.33 (h) Plate welded to end of shell
0.20 (i) Plate welded to end of shell (check 0.33*m)
0.30 (j k) Bolted flat heads (include bending moment)
0.30 (m n o) Plate held in place by screwed ring
0.25 (p) Bolted flat head with full face gasket
0.75 (q) Plate screwed into small diameter vessel
0.33 (r s) Plate held in place by beveled edge
Flange Analysis
Body Flange
PVElite calculates actual and allowable stresses for all types of flanges designed and fab-
ricated to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1. The program uses the Code rules
found in Appendix 2 of the ASME Code, latest addenda.
The flange design rules incorporated in the Code were based on a paper written in 1937 by
Waters, Westrom, Rossheim, and Williams. These rules were subsequently published by
Taylor Forge in 1937, and were incorporated into the Code in 1942. For all practical pur-
poses they have been unchanged since that time. The Taylor Forge bulletin, frequently
republished, is also still available, and is one of the most useful tools for flange analysis.
The input and results for the PVElite flange program are roughly modeled on the Taylor
Forge flange design sheets.
The flange analysis model assumes that the flange can be modeled as stiff elements (the
flange and hub) and springs (the bolts and gaskets). The initial bolt loads compress the
gasket. This load needs to be high enough to seat (deform) the gasket, and needs to be high
enough to seal even when pressure is applied. The pressure load adds to the bolt load and
unloads the gasket.
Analysis of a typical flange includes the following steps:
1. Identify operating conditions and materials: determine allowable stresses for the
flange material and the bolting at both ambient and operating temperatures, from the
Code tables of allowable stress.
2. Identify the gasket material and flange facing type. Determine the effective width and
effective diameter of the gasket and the gasket factors from the Code charts.
3. From the design pressure and the gasket information, calculate the required area of the
bolts. Calculate the actual area of the bolts, and make sure it is greater than the
required area. Based on the bolt areas and allowable stresses, calculate the flange
design bolt loads.
4. Calculate the bending moments on the flange. In each case the bending moment is the
product of a load (pressure, gasket load, etc.) and the distance from the bolt circle to
the point of application of the load. The final result is one bending moment for operat-
ing conditions and a second for gasket seating conditions.
The stresses on a given flange are determined entirely by the bending moment on the
flange. All the loads on the flange produce bending in the same direction (i.e., coun-
terclockwise) and this bending is resisted by the ring behavior of the flange, and in
integral flanges by the reaction of the pipe.
5. Based on the flange type (Code Figure 2-4) calculate hub factors and other geometry
factors for the flange. These are found in Code figures 2-7.1, 2-7.2, 2-7.3, 2-7.4, 2-7.5,
and 2-7.6. Formulae are also given in the Code so that computer programs can consis-
tently arrive at the answers that are normally selected from charts in the appendix.
These formulae are implemented in this flange program.
6. Calculate stress formula factors based on the geometry factors and flange thickness.
7. Finally, calculate flange stresses using the stress formula factors and the bending
moments. Compare these stresses to the allowable stresses for the flange material.
The form of the stress equations is:
S = k(geometry)*M/t2
That is, a constant dependant on the flange geometry times the bending moment, divided
by some thickness squared, either the thickness of the flange or the thickness of the hub.
The calculation procedures and format of results in this program are similar to those given
in “Modern Flange Design”, Bulletin 503, Edition VII, published by Taylor Forge. This
program includes the capability to analyze a given flange under the bolting loads imposed
by a mating flange. The program also takes full account of corrosion allowance. The user
enters uncorroded thicknesses and diameters which the program adjusts before performing
the calculations. The program can treat corrosion in a special manner based on the input of
a Yes/No question in the input.
The figure below shows geometry for the Flange analysis program:
Slip-on Flanges
These have hubs, and are normally analyzed as loose type flanges. To qualify as integral
type flanges they require a full penetration weld between the flange and the vessel.
Ring Flanges
These do not have a hub, though they frequently have a weld at the back of the flange.
They are normally analyzed as loose, but may be analyzed as integral if a full penetration
weld is used between the flange and the vessel.
The pair of rings shall be assembled so that the splits in one ring shall be 90 degrees from
the splits in the other.
This cell indicates whether or not the current flange is a TEMA channel cover. A sep-
arate thickness and MAWP are computed for channel covers, as well as the deflection.
Diameter of the Load Reaction (LONG SPAN)
Enter the distance to the center of the gasket on the long side of the flange. This diam-
eter is used to calculate the non- circular flange correction factor for ASME blind
flanges. This factor is discussed in paragraph UG-34 of the ASME code.
Diameter of the Load Reaction (SHORT SPAN) (d)
Enter the distance to the center of the gasket on the short side of the flange. This diam-
eter is used to calculate the non-circular flange correction factor for ASME blind
flanges. This factor is discussed in paragraph UG-34 of the ASME code.
Allowed Channel Cover Deflection
For TEMA Channel Covers, enter the magnitude of the allowed deflection at the cen-
ter of the cover. This value will be used in computing the channel cover thickness and
MAWP, even if it is larger than the allowed deflection. However, a warning message
will be printed stating this problem exists.
Perimeter along the Center of the Bolt Holes (L)
Enter the perimeter of the bolted head measured along the centerline of the bolts. This
value (L) is needed for both non-circular and circular geometries. For a circular head,
enter the value of (3.14159 * bolt circle diameter). For non-circular heads this value
will have to be computed and entered.
Include Corrosion in Flange Thickness Calculations?
The flange thickness is used in several places throughout Appendix 2. The Code states
that every dimension used should be corroded. In the flange stress calculations the
flange thickness is used. However, some feel that the corrosion should not be taken off
of the thickness for the stress calculations. Answering yes or no to this question will
inform the program what it is you wish to do.
Flange ID ( B’ for Reverse Types)
Enter the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be
the inner pipe diameter. This value is referred to as “B” in the ASME code. The corro-
sion allowance will be used to adjust this value - two times the corrosion allowance
will be added to the uncorroded ID given by the user. For a blind flange this entry
should be 0 (in flange dialog only).
Flange OD
Enter the outer diameter of the flange. This value is referred to as “A” in the ASME
code.
Flange Face Outer Diameter
Enter the outer diameter of the flange face. The program uses the minimum of the
flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange
contact point, but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is
done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket.
Flange Face Inner Diameter
Enter the inner diameter of the flange face. The program uses the maximum of the
flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
Hub Length
Enter the hub length. This value is referred to as “h” in the ASME code. When analyzing
an optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, the hub length should be the leg of
the weld, and the thickness at the large end should include the thickness of the weld. When
you analyze a flange with no hub, i.e. a ring flange, a lap joint flange, etc., you should
enter zero for the hub length, the small end of the hub, and the large end of the hub. How-
ever, when you design as a loose flange or a ring flange which has a fillet weld at the back,
enter the size of a leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub. This will insure that the
program designs the bolt circle far enough away from the back of the flange to get a
wrench around the nuts.
Caution You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Caution You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry: 1 - TEMA Bolt Table, 2 - UNC Bolt Table, 3 - User
specified root area of a single bolt.
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis.
Gasket Factor m
The gasket factor m is one of two parameters defined by the ASME Code to characterize
the behavior of the gasket material. The gasket factor is the multiple of the line pressure
required as a stress on the gasket to ensure no leakage. For example, a gasket material with
a factor of 4 requires a gasket stress of 200 psi if the line pressure is 50 psi. The gasket fac-
tor m is listed in ASME Section VIII Division 1 Appendix 2 Table 2-5.1. This table is
reproduced at the end of this Flange Analysis section.
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d.
External Loads
Flanges are frequently subject to external forces and moments, in addition to internal pres-
sure. The program calculates a roughly approximate equivalent pressure for flanges
loaded axially and/or in bending using the following formula:
Peq = Pdes + 4F/πG2+16*Μ/πG3
Where:
Peq = Equivalent pressure, psi
Pdes = Design pressure, psi
F = Axial force, lbs
M = Bending moment, in-lbs
G = Diameter of gasket load reaction, in.
The program then uses the equivalent pressure as the design pressure.
Basering Dialog
The Basering Dialog lets the user input the basering data.
Note Use the Plot key to get a detailed sketch of the geometry you typed in.
Basering Analysis
The PVElite basering module performs thickness calculations and design for annular plate
baserings, top rings, bolting, and gussets found on skirts for vertical vessels. These calcu-
lations are performed using industry standard calculation techniques as described below.
For narrow base plate rings an approximate solution may be constructed using numerical
iteration. It is assumed that the concrete annulus under the base plate may be treated as a
thin ring of mean diameter c. Assuming the foundation to be linearly elastic, and the base
plate to be relatively rigid, Brownnell and Young have developed an approximate solution
which, can be cast in a form suitable for numerical solution. Let the total tensile stress area
of all foundation bolts be A. Within the limits of accuracy sought, it is permissible to
replace the bolts with a thin shell of thickness t and mean diameter equal to the bolt circle
diameter c, such that t = A / PI * c. We assume that the discrete tensile bolt loads, acting
around the ring, are replaced by a line load, varying in intensity with the distance from the
neutral plane.
Let n be the ratio of Young’s moduli of the bolt material to that of the concrete; n normally
varies between 10 and 15. Assuming that the concrete can take only compression (non-
adhesive surface) and that the bolts are effective only in tension (untapped holes in base
plate), an analysis [similar to that given above] yields the following results:
p = (2 * W + r2 * t * c * s) / [(t3 - t) * r1 * c]
s = (2 * (M - W * r4 * c) / (r2 * r3 * t * c ** 2)
alpha = acos[ (s - n * p) / ( s + n * p )]
Where:
t3 = width of basering (similar to l in Jawad & Farr’s equations above)
c = bolt circle diameter
r1-r4 = four constants based on the neutral axis angle, and defined in Singh &
Soler equations 20.3.12 through 20.3.17, not reproduced here.
These equations give the required 7 non-linear equations to solve for 7 unknowns, namely
p, c, alpha, and the ri (i = 1, 4) parameters. The simple iteration scheme described below
converges rapidly. The iterative solution is started with assumed values of s and p; say so
and po [the program takes these from the approximate analysis it has just performed]. Then
alpha is determined via the above equation. Knowing alpha the dimensionless parameters
r1, r2, r3, and r4 are computed. This enables computation of corrected values of p and s
(say po’ and so’). The next iteration is started with s1 and p1 where we choose:
s1 = .5 * (so + so ’)
p1 = .5 * (po + po ’)
This process is continue until the errors ei and Ei at the ith iteration stage are within speci-
fied tolerances, (ei = Ei = 0.005 is a practical value), where:
e i = (si’ - si) / si
E i = (pi’ - pi) / pi
Actual numerical tests show that the convergence is uniform and rapid regardless of the
starting values of so and po.
Once the new values of bolt stress and bearing pressure are calculated, the thickness of the
basering is calculated again using the same formula given above for the approximate
method.
The actual compression is calculated as described above, then compared to the allowed
compression per AISC. The thickness is then modified and another calculation performed
until the actual and allowed compressions are within one half of one percent of one
another.
Basering Design
When the user requests a basering design, the program performs the following additional
calculations to determine the design geometry.
Process Equipment Design, by Brownell and Young. It is also discussed in the book, Pres-
sure Vessel Design Manual, by Dennis R. Moss. This baseplate design method is based on
the neutral axis shift method and will in general design a thinner basering than the method
discussed in the previous paragraphs.
Thickness of Basering
Enter the actual thickness of basering. Any allowances for corrosion or mill tolerance etc.
should be subtracted from this entered thickness. PVElite will compute the required
basering thickness using the simplified method and the neutral axis shift method. The user
entered thickness value will be used only for comparison.
Number of Bolts
Enter the bolts that the basering design calls for. If in design mode, the program may
change the number of bolts being used. The bolts are sized based on the maximum load
per bolt in the operating case. The computation of the load per bolt is referenced in Jawad
and Farr, equation 12.3. The number of bolts can be between 4 and 12ty0.
Height of Gussets
Enter the gusset dimension from the basering to the top of the gusset plate. The forces in
the skirt are transmitted to the anchor bolts through the gussets.
The tailing lug calculation is included in the basering analysis for a single or dual type
design as depicted in the figure on the following page. The design is based on a lift posi-
tion where no bending occurs on the tailing lug. The main considerations for the design
are the section modulus, shear and bearing stress at the pinhole and the weld strength.
The location of the center of the pin hole will be assumed radially at the edge of the outer
most of the top ring or the basering, which ever is larger. In the absence of the top ring/
plate the height of the tailing lug is required. The tailing lug material is assumed to be the
same material as the gusset or basering. Note that all input fields pertain to one tail lug.
Centerline Offset
Enter the offset dimension (OS) for the dual tailing lug design only.
Lug Thickness
Enter the thickness of the tailing lug.
Discussion of Results
The tailing lug design consists of a three part analysis:
• the basering assembly (basering, skirt and top ring),
• the strength of the weld
• the tailing lug itself
It is assumed that there is no bending in the tailing lug. In the absence of the top ring only
the basering and the decay length (e) are considered for the section modulus calculation.
The table below lists the allowable stresses used to check the design strength.
&KDSWHU
Vessel Detail Data
Introduction
PVElite vessel models are composed of the basic elements (heads, shells, cones, etc.) with
details added to these elements. Vessel details are included for two reasons—to develop
the total vessel deadweight loads, and to collect information for the analysis of vessel
components. Not all of these details are sensible additions to every element. The following
table defines the application of these vessel details to the different elements.
Ring #1 #
Nozzle # # # # # #
Lugs # # # # # # # #
Weight # # # # # # # #
Forces / # # # # # # # #
Moments
Platform 2 # # # # # #
Saddle 3 #
2
Tray Y/N 4
1
# indicates that this element type may have several of these details defined
2
Vertical vessels only
3
Horizontal vessels only
4
Y/N (Yes or No) indicates that this element may have this detail turned on or turned off
5
Vertical vessels only and only if no skirt is defined
It is also useful to note here the positioning of certain vessel “details” are applied at a
point, such as over a length of the element. A good example is insulation. For a bottom (or
left) head, the insulation (element detail) actually starts before the “From” node and cov-
ers the head to the “To” node. For a 60 inch diameter elliptical bottom head, the start point
of the insulation is 15 inches below the “From” node (enter -15 for the “Distance from
From Node”). If the head has the standard 3 inch straight flange, then the insulation covers
18 inches of the element (enter 18 for the “Height/Length of the Insulation”). See the
chapter on Details for more information.
The individual detail windows generally have the following buttons available:
• PREV. - Saves the current detail data to memory and displays the previous detail of
the same type for the element. If there is no previous detail, an error message will be
displayed.
• NEXT - Saves the current detail data to memory and displays the next detail of the
same type for the element. If no additional detail of this type exists, the program will
create a default detail for the user’s modification. PVElite registers details by the
Detail ID. If the current detail does not have a Detail ID defined, the program will dis-
play an error message if this button is used.
• DELETE - Deletes the current detail and displays the data of the next detail of this
type, if it exists. If there is not a next detail, the data of the previous detail, if it exists,
will be displayed on the window. If no previous detail exists for the element, a new
detail listing will be created.
• OK - Allows the user to save the data of the current detail and close the window. Note
that the program will generate an error and not save the data if no Detail ID is speci-
fied.
• CANCEL - Closes the window without saving the current data.
• MATERIAL - Brings up the material selection window. Clicking on a material name
from the program’s database will close the material selection window and bring that
material name into the detail data. As not all details require a material definition, not
all detail edit windows contain this button.
• HELP - Displays general help for the detail window.
Other buttons not shown in the illustration above:
• SECTIONID - This option is available for leg details. Clicking here will bring up the
database names for the wide variety of cross section data stored in PVElite. As with
MATERIAL..., clicking on a name in the database will close the database and copy the
selected name into the Section ID field.
• FULL - This option appears with those details which involve some length such as
insulation, packing and liquid. These details require a start position and end position
(entered as a distance from From node and height/length of detail). If the detail
extends throughout the element, clicking on this button will automatically calculate
and enter these values so that the detail “covers" ’the entire element. This feature is
very useful for heads where these two terms (distance and height/length) may not be
obvious. Remember that the From node and To node mark the ends of the straight
flange portion of the head element and the head itself starts before or extends beyond
this node pair. This leads to negative distances from the From node or a larger height/
length of the detail.
• ALL - This option allows some detail types such as insulation to be applied over the
entire vessel at one time. Of course the detail type can be edited on an individual basis
on any element if the ALL feature has been used.
Note that only the details of the current element are accessible. To review or define details
on other elements, the element of interest must be made current by clicking on it first.
Note The Detail Edit window may also be accessed directly from the graphic image
found in the Build and Define modes. Simply click the left mouse button on the
element to make it current and then click the right mouse button on the detail of
interest. For details that cannot be “right button” clicked such as liquid, simply
click the detail on the detail toolbar and its associated edit dialog will appear.
From Node
The From Node is an element identifier that cannot be entered or modified. The From
Node (and the highlighted element on the graphic) indicates the element which contains
the detail.
For the Detail Enter the axial distance between the “From” node and the
following location:
Ring Centerline of the ring
Nozzle Centerline of the nozzle
Lug Centroid of the lug attachment weld
Weight Point at which the weight acts
Force/Moment Point at which the force or moment acts
Platform Axial distance from the node to the bottom of the platform
Saddle Vertical centerline of the saddle
Trays Bottom of the lowest tray
Legs Centroid of the leg attachment weld
Packing Start of the packed section
Liquid Start of the liquid section
Insulation Start of the insulated section
Lining Start of the lined section
Detail ID
Enter any alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. While not required, it is suggested to
assign unique names for unique items for clear reporting. For example, nozzles should be
unique as their individual identification is important while insulation on all elements, if
consistent throughout, may be named INSUL on each element. Some consistency will
help your naming process. You may wish to use the From node number with an alphabeti-
cal extension showing the detail type and the number of such details if needed. For exam-
ple, for a nozzle, insulation and ring defined on the element From node 20 To node 30 you
may have Detail IDs of “NOZL A”, “INSUL”, and “20 RING 1 of 2”, respectively.
5-6 Vessel Detail Data
PVElite - User Guide Rings
Rings
The Stiffening Ring Dialog lets the user input and edit the data of the rings which are
attached to the current element. These data are used in the calculation of the weight of the
ring and, for external pressure checks, in the calculation of the ring area and inertia.
When using the ASME Code, the following data screen is displayed.
As the stiffening ring data is entered, PVElite will automatically compute the inertias
required and available provided it is not a cone to cylinder junction ring. For bar rings, the
program will size a new ring based on a default thickness of 0.375 inches or the value
given in the Miscellaneous Options dialog located on the Design/Analysis window.
The Check Standards Bars button helps you to select a suitable ring. As you cursor
through the rings, the program will compute the results and place them in a display area at
the bottom of the dialog. A ring that meets the Code requirements is shown in blue and a
failed ring is displayed in red along with a failed message. Ensure the entire vessel is mod-
eled prior to placing and sizing the rings. The Bar Selection dialog is shown below. Use
the mouse, space bar, and arrow keys to navigate this tree.
Thickness of Ring
Enter the axial thickness of the stiffening ring.
Ring Material
Enter a name of the ring material from the program’s material database or select the mate-
rial name by first clicking on the Ring Material button. Individual material parameters
may be viewed and modified by pressing Enter when the cursor is in this field.
PVElite allows entry of the generic entry of any type of stiffener. To do this you must
know the cross sectional area of the stiffener as well as the moment of inertia and the dis-
tance from the shell surface to the ring centroid. If you are using an American type struc-
tural shape simply click on the section type button and then click on the type of geometry
being used. If a non-American type section ring is being used, enter in the properties for
your section type.
Moment of Inertia
A property of the stiffener typically taken from a structural handbook. Units of inertia are
length to the 4th power.
When using British Standard PD:5500 for a cylindrical section, the following screen is
shown:
Nozzles
Nozzle Dialog lets the user input and edit the data of the nozzles which are attached to the
current element. These nozzles will add to the total deadweight of the vessel. Even if the
deadweight is not significant, entering the nozzles may be very important as the data
entered here will be used to evaluate the flange’s and vessel’s maximum allowable pres-
sure (MAP). The nozzle flange MAP will be set according to the element temperature, the
nozzle class and the flange grade according to ANSI B16.5.
If one of the nozzles controls the vessel’s MAP and a vertical hydrotest is carried out in
accordance with ASME UG 99(c), be sure to enter the correct “Flange Distance to Top” in
the Global Design Data. Flange distance to top will be the distance from the controlling
flange to the top of the vessel. See the Global Data chapter for more information.
Nozzle Analysis
PVElite calculates required wall thickness and area of reinforcement for a nozzle in a
pressure vessel shell or head, and compares this area to the area available in the shell, noz-
zle and optional reinforcing pad. The program also calculates the strength of failure paths
for the nozzles. This calculation is based on the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1,
Paragraph UG-37 through UG-45, 1995. The calculation procedure is based on figure UG-
37.1.
The program calculates the required thickness (for reinforcement conditions) based on
inside diameter for the following vessel components:
The program evaluates nozzles at any angle (less than 90 degrees) away from the perpen-
dicular, allowing evaluation of off angle or hillside nozzles.
The NOZZLE program takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thick-
ness and corrosion allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when
making calculations for the corroded condition.
The NOZZLE program also performs UCS-66 Minimum Design Metal Temperature
(MDMT) calculations for nozzles.
As the nozzle data is entered, PVElite will automatically perform the ASME area of
replacement or PD:5500 nozzle compensation calculations. A calculation is performed
every time the cursor is moved in between input cells. If there is any error in the input that
will not allow the analysis to be performed, a status of failed will appear at the bottom of
the Nozzle Dialog. The calculation is initiated once the pipe size is specified. If you are
changing data, such as the pad thickness and are not moving between cells, press F5 to
force PVElite to recalculate and display the results. If the calculation has failed, the result
will appear in red. A nozzle that has passed will have blue results. The result is typically
the area and minimum nozzle overstress per 1-7. The program will display the text failed
in brackets, even though the area of replacement may be sufficient. To effectively use this
feature, we suggest that the entire vessel be modeled first, along with the liquid and nozzle
pressure design options set. Also for vessels that have ANSI flanges note that the ANSI
flange rating will be shown on the main Status bar.
Austenitic Steels:
GR 2.1 Type 304
GR 2.2 Type 316
GR 2.3 Type 304L,316L
GR 2.4 Type 321
GR 2.5 Type 347,348
GR 2.6 Type 309
GR 2.7 Type 310
Alloy Steels:
GR 1.5 C-1/2Mo
GR 1.7 1/2Cr-1/2Mo, Ni-Cr-Mo
GR 1.9 1-1/4Cr-1/2Mo
GR 1.10 2-1/4Cr-1Mo
GR 1.13 5Cr-1/2Mo
GR 1.14 9Cr-1Mo
This directive is for vertical vessels only. This option should not be checked if the vessel is
a horizontal vessel.
Tapped Hole Area Loss
This entry is for the exclusion of area needed when holes are tapped into studding outlets
and other similar connection elements. The traditional industry standard is to increase the
area required by the tapped area loss. Values for tapped area loss are shown in the table
below adapted from the Pressure Vessel Design Manual.
Please note that PVElite will not multiply the tapped area loss by 2. It will simply use the
value that has been supplied.
Additional Data for Reinforcing Pad
Pad Outside Diameter along Vessel Surface
Enter the outside diameter of the pad. The diameter of the pad is entered as the length
along the vessel shell - not the projected diameter around the nozzle, although these two
values will be equal when the nozzle is at 90 degrees.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pad. Any allowances for external corrosion should be taken into
account for the pad thickness.
Pad Weld Leg Size as Outside Diameter
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the pad OD and the shell. Note that if
any part of this weld falls outside the diameter limit, the weld will not be included in the
available area.
Depth of Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Neck
Enter the total depth of the groove weld. Most groove welds between the pad and the noz-
zle are full penetration welds. Thus the depth of the weld would be the same as the depth
of the component, that is the thickness of the pad. If the pad is attached with a partial pen-
etration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter the depth of the partial penetration or a zero,
respectively, in this field.
Pad Material
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material database by pressing
the button "Pad Material" when the cursor is in the material field. If a material is not con-
tained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually.
ASME Code Weld Type
In many cases the Code does not require weld strength/path calculations for full penetra-
tion groove welds for pressure loadings. If your weld detail is per UW-16.1 sketch (a), (b),
(c), (d), (e), (f-1), (f-2), (f-3), (f-4), (g), (x-1), (y-1) or (z-1) and you do not wish the pro-
gram to perform the weld strength calculation, enter in a designation such as A. If you
wish PVElite to perform this calculation regardless of the type of weld, leave this field
blank.
Flange Type
This is the type of nozzle flange. This value is not used by the program, but is echoed out
for documentation purposes.
Flange Material
This is the material the flange is constructed of. This value is not used by the program, but
is echoed out for documentation purposes. The flange material should correspond to the
type listed for the flange grade.
Lugs
The Lugs Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the sets of lugs which
are attached to the current element. If no skirt or legs are defined for a vertical vessel, the
lowest set of lugs will be used as the vessel support point for deadload and levelled calcu-
lations.
PVElite allows the entry of one of three types of support lug geometries:
1 - simple geometry with gussets
2 - gusseted geometry with top plate
3 - gusseted geometry with continuous top ring
Depending on the type of geometry selected, additional data will need to be entered.
Height of Gussets
Enter the height of one gusset.
Thickness of Gussets
Enter the thickness of the gusset plate.
Number of Lugs
Enter the number of support lugs around the periphery of the vessel at this location.
Pad Width
The reinforcing pad width is measured along the circumferential direction of the vessel.
The pad width must be greater than the attachment width. The length of the attachment is
measured along the axis of the vessel.If the box is checked to perform the analysis
and the pad properties are filled in, the program will compute the stresses at the edge of
the attachment and the edge of the pad.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness o of the pad. Any allowances for the external corrosion should be
taken in to account for the pad thickness.
Pad Length
Enter the outside diameter of the pad. The diameter of the pad is entered as the length
along the vessel shell - not the projected diameter around the nozzle, though these two val-
ues will be equal when the nozzle is at 90 degrees.
Weight
The Weight Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the weights which
are added to the current element.
Miscellaneous Weight
Enter a weight value. This could be generated by an attached piece of equipment such as a
motor, by internals such as piping, or by externals such as structural elements. Note that
this value will affect the seismic analysis.
For horizontal vessels, the weight will add to the saddle loads and the offset dimension
will not be used, but will be echoed for documentation purposes.
Force in X, Y, or Z Direction
Enter the force in the selected direction. Note that the Y direction is always vertically up,
the X direction is from left to right, and the Z direction is out of the page. Loads perpen-
dicular to the vessel will be resolved into a single vector and applied to create the worst
combination with the live load. Unlike miscellaneous weight, this force is not included in
the seismic analysis.
Platforms
The Platform Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the platforms
which are attached to the current vertical vessel element.
Platform Weight
Enter the weight of the platform.
Platform Width
Enter the radial width of the platform. The platform width, grating weight and railing
weight are used to compute the weight of the platform when the “Calculate Weight” but-
ton is pressed.
Platform Height
The platform height is the distance from the floor plate to the top hand rail. This dimen-
sion is usually 42 inches. The program uses this value to compute the wind area when one
of the Wind area calculation buttons is pressed.
Platform Clearance
The platform clearance is distance between the outer shell surface and the inner diameter
of the platform. The value is used to compute the floor area of the platform.
Saddles
The Saddle Edit Window lets the user input and edit the data of the saddles which are
attached to the current horizontal cylinder. The size and location of the saddles are impor-
tant for the Zick calculations of local stresses on horizontal vessels with saddle supports.
For proper Zick analysis, only two saddles may be defined and they do not have to be
symmetrically placed about the center of the vessel axis. If no saddles are defined for a
horizontal vessel, the deadload and live load calculations will not be performed.
Width of Saddle
Enter the width of the saddle support. This width does not include any wear pad on the
vessel side.
Saddle Dimension A
This distance is the length between the centerline of the saddle support and the tangent line
of the nearest head. This dimension is usually labeled A in most pressure vessel texts.
E for Plates
Enter the modulus of elasticity for the material used to make the saddles.
Baseplate Length
This is the long dimension of the baseplate which is in contact with the supporting surface.
This value is comparable with the vessel diameter.
Baseplate Thickness
This is the thickness of the baseplate support.
Baseplate Width
This is the short dimension (Width) of the baseplate.
Number of Ribs
The ribs run parallel to the long axis of the vessel. Enter the number of ribs on one saddle
support.
Rib Thickness
Enter the thickness of the rib supports.
Web Thickness
The web is the part of the support structure to which the ribs are attached. Enter the thick-
ness of the web here.
Web Location
There are 2 possible locations for the webs, Center or Side. Enter a 0 for center and a 1 for
side.
Trays
The Tray Edit Window allows the user to enter and edit the one set of equally spaced trays
with a set liquid height for the current element. The Distance from “From” Node will be to
the bottom of the lowest tray. Trays may only be entered for vertical vessels.
Number of Trays
Enter the number of trays for the current element.
Tray Spacing
Enter the vertical distance between trays.
Legs
The Legs Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the legs which are
attached to the current element. Legs may be entered for vertical vessels that have no skirt
element.
Leg Orientation
Select the orientation of the leg to the centerline. Here each selection stands for
Number of Legs
Enter the number of legs.
Section Identifier
Enter the AISC section identifier for the vessel. The program holds data on 929 different
AISC sections. The Section ID database may be displayed by pressing the “SectionID”
button or press [Alt-S] keystroke combination. The section identifier can be selected
directly from the database.
Length of Leg
Enter the distance from the attachment point of the leg to the ground.
Packing
The Packing Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the packing which
is attached to the current element.
Density of Packing
Enter the density of the packing. The following table lists some typical densities, shown in
lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using another units system.
4 36.0 1 30.0
1 39.0 2 4.50
2 37.0
3 25.0
Liquid
The Liquid Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the liquid which
exists in the current element.
Height/Length of Liquid
Enter the height or length of the liquid on this element. This value is used only to calculate
the weight of the liquid section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the liquid
section will be taken at half this height. This value is also used to calculate the operating
pressure at all points below the liquid.
Density of Liquid
Enter the density of the liquid. Some typical specific gravities and densities are shown
below in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you use another units sys-
tem.
Density
Name Gravity
(lb/ft3)
Insulation
The Insulation Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the insulation
which is attached to the current element.
Insulation Density
Enter the density of the insulation. The following table lists some typical densities, shown
in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using another units sys-
tem.
Density
Name
(lbs/ft3)
Lining
The Lining Edit Window allows the user to input and edit the data of the lining which is
attached to the current element.
Height/Length of Lining
Enter the height or length of the lining on this element. This value is used only to calculate
the weight of the lined section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the lined sec-
tion will be taken at half this height.
Note that if you have lining in a horizontal vessel the value entered in this cell will be the
length of the lined section.
Thickness of Lining
Enter the thickness of the lining or fireproofing. Note that the only distinction between
insulation and lining, from the program’s point of view, is that insulation is on the OD of
the element, while lining is on the ID of the element. Therefore, use the insulation field to
enter OD fireproofing, and the lining field to enter ID fireproofing.
Density of Lining
Enter the density of the insulation, lining, or packing. The following table lists some typi-
cal densities, shown in lbs/ft3. Note that the densities should be converted if you are using
another units system.
Density
Name
(lbs/ft3)
&KDSWHU
General Vessel Data
Global data edit mode allows the user to input and edit the data used by the whole vessel
for analysis and design purposes. Global data includes hydrotest information, structural
load cases, and program re-design instructions.
Rev. A
Design Data
Following is a discussion of the design data parameters that are used for overall vessel
analysis:
Hydrotest Type
The Internal Pressure Calculations report from PVElite will list hydrotest pressures for all
three test types described below. It is important to properly identify the information
requested throughout this input group. That is, even though “Hydrotest Test Position,”
“Projection from Top,” “Projection from Bottom,” and “Flange Distance to Top” are not
used for ASME UG-99(b) or for ASME UG-99(b) footnote 34, these data are necessary to
report the proper hydrostatic test pressure for ASME UG-99(c).
Select the hydrotest type. The analysis program provides three different ways to determine
hydrotest pressure:
1 - ASME UG-99(b)
The hydrotest pressure will be 1.3 times the maximum allowable working pressure for the
vessel multiplied by the lowest ratio of the stress value Sa for the test temperature to the
stress value S for the design temperature. This type of hydrotest is normally used for non-
carbon steel vessels where the allowable stress changes with temperature starting even at a
somewhat low temperature.
2 - ASME UG-99(c)
The hydrotest pressure will be determined by multiplying the minimum MAP by 1.3 and
reducing this value by the hydrostatic head on that element or flange. If the vessel is tested
in the horizontal position, the hydrostatic head will be based on the maximum shell diam-
eter plus the “Projection from Top” plus the “Projection from Bottom” specified later in
this input group. If the vessel is tested in the vertical position and a vessel element sets the
minimum MAP, then the hydrostatic head is set by the distance of that element from the
top of the vessel plus the “Projection from Top.” If the vessel is tested in the vertical posi-
tion and a flange has the minimum MAP, the hydrostatic head is composed of the “Flange
Distance to Top” plus the “Projection from Top.”
Hydrotest Position
This input is required so that the total static head can be determined and subtracted in
accordance with UG-99(c). This field is used in conjunction with the “Projection from
Top,” “Projection from Bottom,” and “Flange Distance to Top” fields to determine the
total static head.
Select one of the following Hydrotest Positions.
• Vertical—the vessel would be tested in the upright or vertical position. Note that not
very many vessels are tested in the vertical position.
• Horizontal—this is the position for the majority of vessels tested. The vessel would
normally be on its side (in the case of a vertical vessel) or in its normal position (for a
horizontal vessel).
Construction Type
Select the type of construction to be included on the name plate. This data is for informa-
tion only; it is reported in the input echo. Available types of construction are:
• Welded—Welded
• Press. Welded—Pressure Welded
• Brazed—Brazed
• Resist. Welded—Resistance Welded
Special Service
Select a type of special service in which the vessel will be used. This data is for informa-
tion only; it is reported in the input echo. Available types of special service are:
• None—None
• Lethal—Lethal Service
• Unfired Steam—Unfired Steam Boiler
• Direct Firing—Direct Firing
• Nonstationary—Nonstationary Pressure Vessel
Degree of Radiography
Select the symbolic representation of the degree of radiography. This data is for informa-
tion only; it is reported in the input echo. Options include:
• RT 1—When the complete vessel satisfies the full radiography requirements of UW-
11(a) and when the spot radiography provisions of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have not been
applied.
• RT 2—When the complete vessel satisfies the full radiography requirements of UW-
11(a)(5) and when the spot radiography provisions of UW-11(a)(5)(b) have been
applied.
• RT 3—When the complete vessel satisfies the spot radiography requirements of UW-
11(b).
• RT 4—When only part of the vessel has met the other category requirements, or when
none of the other requirements are applied.
Miscellaneous Weight
Many designers like to include extra weight to account for vessel attachments and inter-
nals not otherwise included in the models. The total weight of the vessel is multiplied by
1.0 plus this percent (i, e. 1.03, 1.05). The two most common choices are 3.0 or 5.0.
hydrotest allowable stress for the hydrotest. Then this field should be set to Y so that
PVElite will use the defined value without any modification.
Corroded Hydrotest?
By default PVElite uses the uncorroded wall thickness when the stresses on the elements
during the hydrotest are computed. In some cases it is necessary to hydrotest the vessel
after it has corroded. If you wish to use a corroded thickness in the calculations, check this
box. Please note that longitudinal stresses due to Hydrostatic test pressure will also be
computed in a similar manner.
Installation Options
The installation options shown below allow the specification of where the equipment such
as platforms, insulation, lining, etc. will be installed. This information is used to calculate
the center of gravity of the vessel in both the shop and the field (operating ) positions.
Additionally, when computing such items as the fabricated weight, operating weight,
empty weight, etc., PVElite will consider these detail weights as appropriate for the vari-
ous weight cases.
Stiffener Type
For ASME VIII 1 and VIII 2 the program has the ability to determine the maximum stiff-
ener spacing and add rings to the model. If you have selected this position to model, it can
select an appropriate stiffener from the AISC database. The stiffener types are:
• Equal Angle
• Unequal Angle (hard way shown)
• Double Angles with large or small sides back to back
• Channels
• Wide Flanges
6-6 General Vessel Data
PVElite - User Guide Installation Options
• Structural Tees
• Bar
For the bar ring design, the program will design a ring with an aspect ratio of 10 to 1.00.
The height of the ring is 10 times its thickness. The minimum ring width the program will
start out with is 0.5 inches or 12mm.
Rigging Data
The rigging analysis calculates and locates the bending and shear stresses created during
erection process. Where the vessel is lifted from the horizontal position at two lifting
points up to the vertical position where the vessel is set onto the foundation. The safety of
the maximum combined stresses is also analyzed using the unity check method. This anal-
ysis however, does not evaluate the design of any rigging attachment such as, lugs, shack-
les, cables etc
Rigging analysis is performed when the vessel is in the horizontal position where the com-
binations of stresses are at its maximum. The torsional effect is not considered in this anal-
ysis. The vessel is erected using two lifting points where the tail and lifting lugs are
located. The design weight of the vessel is calculated by multiplying the erected empty
weight, including internals and externals, with an impact factor to simulate the initial lift.
The rigging analysis reports the field and design weight of the vessel, the center of gravity,
the reaction forces at the lifting points, the location for the maximum bending and shear
stresses, and the unity check. As a comparison, the allowable bending (per UG-23) and
shear (0.4 Sy @ ambient) stresses are also reported, and can be plotted with the fore-men-
tioned parameters.
The stresses are calculated in 1 foot increments along the vessel taking into account the
varying diameter and thickness of the shell. A circular cross sectional shape is assumed
throughout the vessel sections with no corrosion allowance included for the thicknesses.
Node numbering starts at the base of the vessel and ends at the top section of the vessel
where the straight line ended. For elliptical heads, the end node is the end of the straight-
line portion. Thus the total height of the vessel is the elevation of the last node.
Impact Factor
PVElite can perform a rigging (combined shear plus bending stress) analysis granted that Rev. A
the vessel has a support such as a skirt and the impact factor and lug elevations defined.
When the vessel is lifted from the ground, it may be yanked suddenly. The impact factor Rev. A
takes this into account. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0, although values as high
as 3.0 may be entered in. The impact factor effectively increases the overall weight of the
vessel by the impact factor. If you do not wish to perform the rigging analysis, set the
impact factor to 0.
Design Modification
Select Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure
If the user toggles on this button and the required element thickness for internal pressure
exceeds the user’s finished thickness for the element, the program will increase the user’s
finished thickness to meet or exceed the thickness required for internal pressure. PVElite
will exceed the required thickness only if the round off switch is activated in the program
configuration (the round off will bump the thickness up to the next 1/8 inch in English
units or to the next millimeter in metric units). The program will perform this calculation
automatically as the model data is being typed in. Check this box before any part of the
vessel has been modelled. If the given thickness is greater than the required thickness, then
the program will not alter the given value.
Note that during the input phase, the program cannot check the required thickness for
flanges. That check will be performed during the analysis phase.
Load Case
The program performs calculations for various combinations of internal pressure, external
pressure, hydrotest pressure, wind load, and seismic load. You can define up to twelve
combinations of these loadings for the program to evaluate. Load cases are defined by a
string that shows the loads to be added, i.e. “IP+OW+WI”, which would be the sum of
internal pressure plus operating weight plus wind. Typical definitions for the load cases
are shown below, followed by the definition of the load case abbreviations:
• Load Case 1: NP+EW+WI+FW
• Load Case 2: NP+EW+EQ+FS
• Load Case 3: NP+OW+WI+FW
• Load Case 4: NP+OW+EQ+FS
• Load Case 5: NP+HW+HI
• Load Case 6: NP+HW+HE
• Load Case 7: IP+OW+WI+FW
• Load Case 8: IP+OW+EQ+FS
• Load Case 9: EP+OW+WI+FW
• Load Case 10: EP+OW+EQ+FS
• Load Case 11: HP+HW+HI
• Load Case 12: HP+HW+HE
• Load Case 13: IP+WE+EW
• Load Case 14: IP+WF+CW
• Load Case 15: IP+VO+OW
• Load Case 16: IP+VE+OW
• Load Case 17: IP+VF+CW
Where:
NP = No Pressure
IP = Internal Pressure
EP = External Pressure
HP = Hydrotest Pressure
EW = Empty Weight
OW = Operating Weight
HW = Hydrotest Weight
WI = Wind Load
EQ = Earthquake Load
HE = Hydrotest Earthquake
HI = Hydrotest Wind
WE = Wind Bending Empty New and Cold
WF = Wind Bending Filled New and Cold
CW = Axial Weight Stress New and Cold
FS = Axial Stress due to Axial Forces (Seismic)
FW = Axial Stress due to Axial Forces (Wind)
If you checked the box to perform vortex shedding calculations, the following load case
descriptors may be used:
VO = Bending Stress due to Vortex Shedding Loads (Ope)
VE = Bending Stress due to Vortex Shedding Loads (Emp)
VF = Bending Stress due to Vortex Shedding Loads (Test No CA.)
The live loads (wind and earthquake) are calculated for two conditions - operating and
hydrotest. In both cases, the basic loads calculated are identical but the hydrotest live loads
are usually a fraction of the operating live load. These hydrostatic fractions (percents) are
entered in the live load definitions.
Note Optionally, for full replacement options, you can type in your own value of tr for
each nozzle. That value will override this directive.
Wind Data
Wind Design Code
Select one wind of the design codes:
• ASCE — American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1)
The program implements ASCE 7-93.
• UBC — Uniform Building Code. The program implements the 1991 edition.
• NBC — National Building Code of Canada. The program implements the 1990 edi-
tion.
• User Defined Wind Profile. — Instead of supplying the wind parameters required by
the above codes, the user may specify the elevation vs. wind pressure directly.
• ASCE-1995/98 — The American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 1995/1998.
This revision includes a new calculation for the gust factor as well as the wind pres-
sure at height Z. These calculations are based on a 3 second gust.
• IS-875 — This is India’s National Standard Wind design code. The year of this code is
1987.
The remaining wind load data required by PVElite changes based on which Wind Design
Code is selected. These data requirements are reviewed here according to the design code
specification.
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the ASCE-7 Exposure Factor:
Entry Definition
1 Exposure A, Large city centers
2 Exposure B, Urban and suburban areas
3 Exposure C, Open terrain
4 Exposure D, Flat unobstructed coastal areas
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height
of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a
pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pres-
sures than if it were mounted at grade.
Category Classification
I Buildings and structures not listed below
II Buildings and structures where more than 300 people congregate in one area.
III Buildings designed as essential facilities, hospitals etc.
IV Buildings and structures that represent a low hazard in the event of a failure.
Note that most petrochemical structures are Importance Category I.
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the UBC Exposure Factor as defined in Section 2312:
Entry Definition
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set
the Gust Factor Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 23-G.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height
of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a
pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pres-
sures than if it were mounted at grade.
Entry Definition
Most petrochemical structures have an Importance Factor of 1.0. The four Occupancy Cat-
egories (I-IV) are defined in Table 23-K of the code.
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the NBC Exposure Factor:
Entry Definition
Note that most petrochemical site use a value 1, Exposure A. Note also that these exposure
factors are reversed from those of ASCE-7 or UBC.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height
of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a
pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pres-
sures than if it were mounted at grade.
Entry Definition
0.0016 for tall towers ( L/D > 7 )
0.0032 for moderately tall towers
0.0064 for short towers ( L/D < 1) or horizontal
Roughness Factor
Enter an integer indicating the NBC Roughness Factor as found in Figure B-15:
Entry Definition
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 1, moderately smooth, except that some
designers use a value of 3, very rough, to account for platforms, piping, ladders, etc.
instead of either entering them explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an
increased wind diameter.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height
of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a
pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pres-
sures than if it were mounted at grade.
Exposure Constant
Enter an integer indicating the ASCE Exposure Factor:
Entry Definition
Note that most petrochemical site use a value 1, Exposure A. Note also that these exposure
factors are reversed from those of ASCE-7 or UBC.
Importance Factor
This value varies between .087 and 1.15 and is found in Table 6-2 of ASCE 95.
Roughness Factor
Enter an integer indicating the Roughness Factor as found in Table 6-7:
Entry Definition
Note that most petrochemical sites use a value of 1, moderately smooth, except that some
designers use a value of 3, very rough, to account for platforms, piping, ladders, etc.
instead of either entering them explicitly as a tributary wind area or implicitly as an
increased wind diameter.
Crest Distance
This is the distance upwind of the crest where the difference in ground elevation is half the
hill or escarpment height.
Type of Hill
• 0 - none
• 1 - 2-D ridge
• 2 - 2-D escarpment
• 3 - 3-D axisymmetric hill
Damping Factor
Enter the structural damping coefficient (percentage of critical damping). The damping
factor is used in the calculation of the gust response factor. Additionally, if you wish to run
another case empty or filled (or both), specify the values of the damping factor (beta) for
these cases. By entering these values PVElite will compute the gust response factor for
each case and the subsequent wind loads. The results will be displayed in the Wind Load
Calculation and Wind Shear and Bending reports.
For vessels that have a constant diameter the value of h/d is straightforward. The ratio is
merely the total height of the vessel divided by the insulated outside diameter. This com-
putation is more difficult for vessels of more than 1 diameter (i.e.: vessels that have
cones). The first step is to compute the total height h. Next the total cross sectional area of
the vessel is computed. To get a properly weighted value for h/d we square the maximum
height and divide by the total area. Finally to get Cf we index into the table as needed and
interpolate for the final value. If you have a shape factor specified and do not wish to use
the computed value, specify your own shape factor in the Tools, Configuration option
from the Main Menu.
Base Elevation
Enter the elevation at the base of the vessel. This value will be used to calculate the height
of each point in the vessel above grade. Thus, for example, if the vessel is mounted on a
pedestal foundation, or on top of another vessel, it will be exposed to higher wind pres-
sures than if it were mounted at grade.
Risk Factor
This is the value of K1 and it varies between 1.05 and 1.08 depending on which zone has
been entered above.
Terrain Category
The terrain category varies between 1 and 4.
Category 1
Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions including open sea coasts and treeless
plains.
Category 2
Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights between 1.5 to 10 meters. This
category is generally used for design purposes.
Category 3
This is terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions which have buildings up to 10
M in height. This includes well wooded areas, towns and industrial areas fully or partially
developed.
Category 4
Terrain consisting of large closely spaced obstructions. This category includes large urban
centers and well developed industrial centers.
Equipment Class
This field accepts a value of 1, 2, or 3.
Class A - 1
Class B - 2
Class C - 3
Note When entering this data, you need to multiply the wind pressure at each elevation
by the shape factor you wish to use. If you do not do this, your wind loads will be
higher (conservative) than they really are.
The first Elevation field should not be zero. If it is zero the program will not compute the
wind loads on the following elements. The input should follow the convention below.
Seismic Data
Seismic Design Code
Select the design code to use for seismic calculations:
• ASCE-88 — American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1)
released in 1988.
• ASCE-93 — American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI A58.1)
released in 1993. The new ASCE 7 earthquake standards released in 1993 are signifi-
cantly more involved than the previous standards, and are also more strictly limited to
buildings, and thus not as easily applied to vessels. Temporarily the program does not
implement the complete dynamic analysis according to this standard. However the
program does address the computation of the element mass multiplier as outlined on
page 62 of the standard. In effect, the factors Av, Cc, P, and ac are multiplied together
and then by the weight of the element to obtain the lateral force on the element. The
program then computes the moments on the tower based on these results. One should
have a good understanding of this code before using it.
• UBC — Uniform Building Code. The program implements the 1991 edition.
• NBC — National Building Code of Canada. The program implements the 1990 edi-
tion.
• IS-1893 RSM — India's seismic design code based on the response spectrum method.
• IS-1893 SCM — India's seismic design code based on the seismic coefficient method.
• ASCE-95 — American Society of Civil Engineers 1995 edition. The methodology of
this calculation is very similar to other earthquake codes. Essentially the base shear is
computed based on paragraph 9.2.3.4 and the paragraphs which proceed it. The base
shear is then distributed to the elements according to the equation 9.2.3.4-2 on page 70
of the standard.
• UBC97 — Uniform Building Code. The 1997 version of this code is implemented.
• G Loading — Acceleration of the vessel based on a fraction of gravity. Rev. A
• ASCE 7-98 — American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7 (formerly ANSI
A58.1) released in 1998.
Rev. A
• IBC-2000 — International Building Code released in 2000.
• Response Spectrum —The response spectrum analysis allows the use of modal time Rev. A
history analysis. The general design guidelines for this analysis are taken from the
ASCE 7-98 or IBC 2000 Codes. Other predefined spectra are built into the program,
such as the 1940 Earthquake El Centro and various spectra from the United States
National Regulatory Commission Guide 1.60. If the spectrum analysis type is user-
defined, the table of points that define the response spectra must be entered in the
table, in the appropriate units. For tall structures, this analysis gives a much more
accurate calculation than the typical static equivalent method. Usually the computed
loads are lower in magnitude than those computed using the conventional Building
Code techniques.
Entry Definition
Soil Type
Enter an integer indicating the Soil Profile Coefficient, S found in Table 24 of the stan-
dard. Soil Profiles are identified in Section 9.4.2 of the standard. Note that where soil
properties are not known, soil profiles S2 or S3 shall be used, whichever produces the
larger value of CS. (C is defined in Eq. 8 of the standard.)
Entry Definition
2 Soil Profile S2: Deep cohesion less deposits or stiff clay conditions
(S Factor = 1.2)
3 Soil Profile S3: Soft- to medium-stiff clays and sands
(S Factor = 1.5)
Entry Definition
Note that the value most often used is 2.0, though 2.5 is sometimes chosen for tanks sup-
ported by structural steel or legs.
Seismic Zone
Select the zone for seismic calculations. See ASCE 7-88 Figures 14 & 15 to select the
appropriate zone. Values for Seismic Coefficient, Z are found in Table 21 of the standard.
Zone Definition
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 4 indicates the greatest
chance of an earthquake.
Seismic Coefficient Cc
Enter Cc, the system seismic coefficient for mechanical and electrical components from
Table 9.8-2 on page 63 of the code. For tanks, vessels and heat exchangers this value is
normally taken as 2.0.
Entry Definition
1.5 Seismic Hazard Exposure Group III: Essential facilities required for
post-earthquake recovery
1.0 Seismic Hazard Exposure Group II: Buildings that have a substantial
public hazard due to occupancy or use
0.5 Seismic Hazard Exposure Group I: All other buildings
Amplification Factor ac
Enter ac, the attachment amplification factor determined in accordance with ASCE 7-93
Table 9.8-3. Values for this entry may be 1.0 or 2.0 depending on the relationship between
the fundamental period of the vessel and the fundamental period of its supporting struc-
ture.
Entry Definition
Soil Type
Select the soil type (S1 to S4) defined in Table 23-J of the code. Note that where soil prop-
erties are not known, soil profile S3 shall be used.
Soil Definition
3 Soil Profile S3:Not more than 40 ft. of soft clay (S Factor = 1.5)
Seismic Zone
Select the zone for seismic calculations. See UBC-91 Figure No. 23-2 to select the appro-
priate zone. The zone establishes the Seismic Zone Factor, Z, found in Table No. 23-I.
Zone Definition
3 Zone 2b:Valley area west of the Rockies and the Pacific Northwest
(Z = 0.20)
4 Zone 3:Sierras. (Z = 0.30)
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 5 indicates the greatest
chance of an earthquake.
Entry Definition
1.3 Schools
Soil Type
Select the soil factor (From Table 4.1.9C) for the site:
Soil Definition
Entry Definition
Note Elevated tank analysis also includes the special provisions of sentence 4.1.9.3 (3).
Acceleration Zone
Select the acceleration-related seismic zone. For locations in Canada, the velocity and
acceleration seismic zones are found in the city list, Chapter 1 of the supplement to NBC.
Here are some examples of each zone:
0 Calgary, Alberta
1 Toronto, Ontario
3 Varennes, Quebec
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 6 indicates the greatest
chance of an earthquake.
Velocity Zone
Select the zone indicating the velocity-related seismic zone. For locations in Canada, the
velocity and acceleration seismic zones are found in the city list, Chapter 1 of the supple-
ment to NBC. Here are some examples of each zone:
0 Steinbach, Manitoba
1 Calgary, Alberta
2 Montreal, Quebec
4 Dawson, Yukon
Note that 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while 6 indicates the greatest
chance of an earthquake.
Importance Factor
The importance factor is taken from table 4 in the IS-1893 standard. This value ranges
from a maximum of 6.0 to 1.0.
• 6.0—A value typically used in nuclear applications.
• 2.0—Dams of all types and lethal service applications
• 1.5—Used in the design of important structures such as hospitals, tanks, water towers,
and large assembly structures.
• 1.0—All others
Soil Factor
The soil factor (Beta) is taken from Table 3 of the IS-1893 seismic design code. This value
ranges between 1 and 1.5.
• Type I soils and hard rock should have a value of 1.
• Type II soils should also use a value of 1 except for well foundations or isolated RCC
footings without tiebeams or unreinforced strip foundations which receive a value of
2.0.
• Type III soils can receive a value between 1.0 and 1.5.
Zone Number
The zone number ranges between 1 and 5 and depends on where the vessel will operate in
India. You can determine the zone from a colored map of which is Figure 1 in IS 1893.
Period of Vibration
This field is optional. PVElite computes the natural frequency of the vessel and can thus
compute the period of vibration. If this field is not 0 the program will use the entered
value. This value is used in conjunction with Beta in order to determine Sa/g.
Damping Factor
This value which is used with the period of vibration to determine Sa/g. Values of damp-
ing in the IS 1893 standard are 2, 5, 10 and 20 percent. The program will interpolate for
intermediate values in between 2, 5, 10 and 20 percent. Extreme values will be used if a
damping factor is entered which is outside the range above.
Importance Factor
ASCE-95 does not address an importance factor. However, this value is multiplied times
the other values to compute the base shear. Thusly, this entry can be used as a scale factor
for the base shear. If you do not wish to use this value simply enter a value of 1.0.
Force Factor ( R )
This value is taken from table 9.2.7.5. For vertical vessels, towers, stacks etc. this value is
2.0.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
This value is derived from table 9.1.4.2.4A on page 55 of ASCE7-95. This factor is a func-
tion of the soil profile type and the value of Aa. Typically this will be a given value. How-
ever, if given the soil type and the value Aa, you will need to pick Ca from the table.
Seismic Coefficient Cv
This value is derived from table 9.1.4.2.4B on page 55 of ASCE7-95. This factor is a func-
tion of the soil profile type and the value of Aa. Typically, this will be a given value. How-
ever, if given the soil type and the value Aa, you will need to pick Ca from the table.
The help facility in PVElite contains the above referenced tables.
Category Value
1 - Essential facilities 1.25
2 - Hazardous facilities 1.25
3 - Special occupancy structures 1.0
4 - Standard occupancy structures 1.0
Note that Zone 0 indicates the least chance of a major earthquake, while Zone 4 indicates
the greatest chance of an earthquake.
Importance Factor
This is the occupancy importance factor as given in 9.1.4 (ASCE) 1604.5 (IBC). The
importance factor accounts for loss of life and property. This value typically ranges
between 1.0 and 1.5.
Rev. A
Table—9.4.1.2.4.A Values of Fa as a Function of Site Class and Mapped Short-Period
Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Acceleration
F a a a a a
F a a a a a
Note For intermediate values, the higher value of the straight line interpolation shall be
used to determine the value of Ssor Sl.
a
Site specific geo-technical information and dynamic site response analyses shall be
performed.
b
Site specific studies required per Section 9.4.1.2.4 may result in higher values of
than included on hazard maps, as may the provisions of Section 9.13.
Rev. A
Response Spectrum
Selecting this method performs a dynamic analysis of the vessel, applying loading based
upon the selected seismic Response Spectrum.
Initially, the vessel is modeled as a 2- dimensional structure (note that for asymmetric leg
arrangements, the horizontal direction of interest is taken as that corresponding to the
weakest axis of the arrangement). Next an eigensolution is performed on the vessel, which
determines system mode shapes and modal natural frequencies (all modes with natural fre-
quencies up through 100 HZ are calculated). The seismic response of each mode is then
extracted from the Response Spectrum according to the natural frequency of each mode,
and then adjusted according to the mode’s "participation factor". The system response is
then determined by combining all of the modal responses.
For tall structures, this analysis gives a much more accurate calculation than the typical
static equivalent method. Usually the computed loads are lower in magnitude than those
computed using conventional building Code techniques.
User Defined
This option allows the user to enter a custom seismic response spectrum of type Frequency
or Period vs. Displacement, Velocity, or Acceleration (see instructions below). The same
spectrum will be applied in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
El Centro
This response spectrum is based on the May 18, 1940 El Centro, California earthquake,
North-South component, 5-10% damping as described in Introduction to Structural
Dynamics by John Biggs. This spectrum will be applied in both the horizontal and vertical
directions.
ASCE
Selection of this option performs a seismic analysis according to the requirements of the
modal analysis procedure of ASCE Standard 7-98. The horizontal spectrum is a built
according to the ASCE-7 Section 9.4.1.2.6, while the vertical spectrum provides a flat
acceleration of 0.2S
IBC
Selection of this option performs a seismic analysis according to the requirements of the
modal analysis procedure of the International Building Code 2000 (which happen to mir-
ror those of ASCE-7). The horizontal spectrum is built according to IBC-2000 Section
1615.1, while the vertical spectrum provides a flat acceleration of 0.2 (as per IBC-2000
Section 1617. 1).
1.60D.5
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and
vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission’s Regula-
tory Guide 1.60, for systems with 0.5% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is nor-
malized, so it must be scaled the site’s Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
1.60D2
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and
vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission’s Regula-
tory Guide 1.60, for systems with 2 % of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is nor-
malized, so it must be scaled the site’s Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
1.60D5
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and
vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission’s Regula-
tory Guide 1.60, for systems with 0.5% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is nor-
malized, so it must be scaled the site’s Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
1.60D7
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and
vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission’s Regula-
tory Guide 1.60, for systems with 7% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is nor-
malized, so it must be scaled the site’s Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
1.60D10
Selection of this option applies (in the X- and Y-directions respectively) the horizontal and
vertical spectra specified in the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission’s Regula-
tory Guide 1.60, for systems with 10% of critical damping. Note that this spectrum is nor-
malized, so it must be scaled the site’s Zero Period Acceleration (see below).
Importance Factor
This is used for the ASCE and IBC options. FOr ASCE, this is the I, the occupancy impor-
tance factor determined from ASCE-7 Section 9.14. For IBC, this is the Ie, the occupancy
importance factor in accordance with IBC 1616.2.
Combination Method
Modal responses must be combined in a way that most accurately captures the statistical
correlation of the responses to each other. The available options are:
• SRSS: This method performs a Square Root of the Sum of the Squares combination of
the modal results. This simulates a response where all modal results are assumed to be
uncorrelated with, or totally unrelated to, each other. If the ASCE or IBC method has
been chosen, modal combinations will automatically be performed using this method.
This is usually non-conservative, especially if there are any modes with very close fre-
quencies, since those modes will probably experience their maximum DLF at approx-
imately the same time during the load profile.
• Group: This method performs a group combination method as described in the United
States National Regulatory Commission’s Regulatory Guide 1.92 - responses of
modes with natural frequencies within 10% of each other are combined using the
Absolute Value method, while those sums are combined with each other and with
m0ore far-flung modes, using the SRSS method. This simulates a response where the
results of similar modes are assumed to be correlated, while those of all dissimilar
modes are assumed to be uncorrelated.
• Absolute: This method performs an Absolute Value combination of the modal results.
This simulates a response where all modal results are assumed to be correlated with
each other.
This method gives the most conservative result, since it assumes that the all maximum
modal responses occur at exactly the same time during the course of the applied load.
This is usually overly-conservative, since modes with different natural frequencies
will probably experience their maximum DLF at different times during the load pro-
file.
Response Modification R:
This factor is required for ASDCE-7 and IBC, and is used to reduce the spectrum
response. For ASCE-7 it is determined from Table 9.5.2.2, while for IBC-2000 it is deter-
mined from Table 1617.6 Typical values are 1.25 through 8.0.
For elevated tanks use a value of 4. For horizontal vessels, leg supported vessels and oth-
ers use a value of 3.0.
Coefficient Cd:
This factor, the "deflection amplification factor", is used to scale up the calculated seismic
displacements. For ASCE-7 it is determined from Table 9.5.2.2, while for IBC-2000 it is
determined from Table 1617.6. Typical values are 1.25 through 6.5.
Range Type:
User Defined spectra may be enter with a range X axis representing either Frequency or
Period. In either case, the data points should be entered with ascending range values.
Note A zero entry for either Frequency or Period is invalid. Interpolation will be made
linearly for intermediate range values. Data points defining the spectrum can be
entered by clicking Edit/Review Spectrum Points.
Ordinate Type:
User Defined spectra may be entered with an ordinate Y axis representing Displacement,
Velocity, or Acceleration entered in units of Diameter, Diameter /second, of G’s respec-
tively. Interpolation will be made linearly for intermediate Ordinate values. Data points
defining the spectrum can be entered by clicking Edit/Review Spectrum Points.
Note Selecting this option should always lead to a more conservative result.
&KDSWHU
PVElite Analysis
Once all the data for the vessel model and analysis have been entered and corrected, the
model is ready for analysis. The pull-down menu under Analyze shows two options:
• Analyze
• Error Check Only
Error Check Only will review all the data and produce an output report listing any errors
that are found. These messages can be examined through the Output - Review option. If
Analyze is selected, PVElite will also run through the error checker but then continue on
(if no errors are found) through the complete analysis.
The analysis program is the heart of the PVElite system. All the data entered into the
model is used by the analysis program to evaluate or design the pressure vessel. In any
given analysis there will be between 16 and 20 analysis steps. As the program completes
each calculation, important information from the step is displayed on the screen. The
screen display at the completion of the internal pressure calculations, for example, lists
both the given element thickness and the required thickness for each element in the vessel.
The program waits for a user response before clearing the screen and moving on to the
next analysis step. The user may respond by continuing on to the next step, continue non-
stop through the remainder of all analysis steps, or quit the analysis. The results of the
analysis are stored in two separate files on the hard disk. The text results of the job are
held in a file with the extension .TAB (e.g. the jobname VES01 will have an input file
named VES01.PVI and a text results file of VES01.TAB) The output processor replaces
this .TAB file with a .T80 file (VES01.T80). The .T80 file contains a complete report for
each analysis step for inspection and printing through the Review processor. The analysis
also creates a .PVR file (e.g.. VES01.PVR); this file is used by the output Review proces-
sor for component analysis. The program transfers to the Review processor at the comple-
tion of the analysis.
PVElite not only analyzes vessels, it also designs vessel walls for pressures and loads. In
addition to increasing the vessel wall thickness, the program can instead introduce stiff-
ener rings to accommodate external pressures. The program directives for these design
modifications are set in each job in the Design Data section of Global Data. In increasing
the wall thickness to meet the required values, PVElite can either set the thickness to the
exact requirement, or, round up to the next nominal value (1/16 inch in English units or 1
mm in metric units). This switch, too, is a setting in the Configuration option under Utility.
If PVElite’s design process changes any of the original input, the program will automati-
cally erase the current output report and return to the beginning of the analysis and restart
the run. All results will reflect the design changes, from the input echo to the added dead-
weight. The user’s original input, however, will not be changed. If a design flag is turned
on and the required thickness is less than the entered thickness, PVElite will increase the
thickness as needed and continue.
program for the given geometry. Thus if the vessel has two heads and some number of
cylindrical elements with no stiffening rings, the program will calculate the design length
for each cylinder using the full length of the vessel plus 1/3 the depth of the heads. If there
are stiffening rings, the program will calculate an appropriately shorter value.
The program displays the formulas and substitutions for the external pressure calculations
on each element. Then the same results are displayed in tabular form.
If the element is not thick enough for the external pressure (and you checked the design
boxes in the input) the program will allow you to increase the thickness and/or add stiffen-
ing rings (which are created automatically and added to your model). If the thickness is
increased the program has to go all the way back to step 3. For rings it simply repeats this
step with the new lengths.
This step also calculates the moment due to individual detail which may not be on the cen-
terline of the vessel. These are usually small. Finally, this step calculates the forces at the
support. The vertical force and bending moment (due to detail weights only) are calculated
for the ‘one support’ cases (skirts, legs, lugs) and the vertical force at each support is cal-
culated when there are two saddle supports.
Note : In addition to computing the above weights PVElite also computes the fabricated
weight, shop test weight, shipping weight, erected weight, empty weight and field test
weight. The computed weights may or may not include removable or field installed items
such as packing and other details. You can specify where these details are to be installed
(either shop or field) in the Global Input. Simply switch to the global input screen and
click the Installation Miscellaneous Options button located on the button bar at the top of
the screen. By default the program assumes that all details will be installed in the shop and
calculate these various weights based on that assumption.
The cumulative weight on the vessel will look drastically different for horizontal vessels
on saddle supports than for vertical vessels on skirts, legs, and lugs:
Horizontal cases: Expect the highest weight forces near the saddles, with almost no weight
force at the ends or in the middle.
Vertical cases: Expect the weight forces to increase from zero at the top to a maximum at
the support. If there are elements below the support, expect the weight force to be nega-
tive.
The cumulative moment includes only the moment due to eccentric details, and is usually
quite small (except in the case of a large applied moment).
Step 14: Shear and Bending Moments due to Wind and Earthquake
These loadings generate horizontal loads, which are usually fine on a horizontal vessel,
but can cause high overturning moments on a vertical vessel. The program calculates the
cumulative shear and bending moment on the vessel, for use in later stress calculations.
There can be as many as twelve cases, combining pressure loads, weight loads, and
moments in various ways. A fairly complete set of load cases is included as a default:
Load Case Definition
1 NP+EW+WI+FW No pressure + empty weight + wind
2 NP+EW+EQ+FS No pressure + empty weight + earthquake
3 NP+OW+WI+FW No pressure + operating weight + wind
4 NP+OW+EQ+FS No pressure + operating weight + earthquake
5 NP+HW+HI No pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro wind
6 NP+HW+HE No pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro earthquake
7 IP+OW+WI+FW Internal pressure + operating weight + wind
8 IP+OW+EQ+FS Internal pressure + operating weight + earthquake
9 EP+OW+WI+FW External pressure + operating weight + wind
10 EP+OW+EQ+FS External pressure + operating weight + earthquake
11 HP+HW+HI Hydrotest pressure + hydrotest weight + hydro wind
12 HP+HW+HE Hydrotest pressure + hydrotest wind + hydro earthquake
13 IP+WE+EW Internal pressure + wind empty + empty weight
14 IP+WF+CW Internal pressure + wind filled + empty weight NO CA
15 IP+VO+OW Internal pressure + vortex shedding (OPE) + operating weight
16 IP+VE+OW Internal pressure + vortex shedding (EMP) + operating weight
17 IP+VF+CW Internal pressure+ vortex shedding (Filled) + empty weight no ca
The difference between wind loads and hydrotest wind loads is simply a ratio (percentage)
defined by the user. This percentage is specified in the Wind Data definition of Global
Data - usually about 33% (thus setting the hydrotest wind load at 33% of the operating
wind load). Likewise, the hydrotest earthquake load is a percentage of the earthquake
load; this percentage is defined in the Seismic Data definition of Global Data.
Some steps that are not applicable for horizontal vessels, such as natural frequency, will
not be printed. Also, if a vessel has no supports, steps greater than 10 will not be com-
puted.
Optional Steps
PVElite includes two analyses that are done under specific circumstances:
1. Cone evaluation - cones are evaluated for internal and external pressure at the large
and small ends, and any stiffening rings near the cones are included and evaluated.
2. Zick stresses - stresses due to saddle supports are evaluated and compared to allow-
able stresses using the method of L.P. Zick. Note that the stresses are calculated for
each saddle, since in PVElite each saddle can have different loading. Note also that
the stresses are not evaluated at the mid span, since the program automatically does
that for all the various load case combinations.
3. AISC Leg Check: After the program has computed all of the weights, forces and
moments, it can then determine the overall state of stress by using the AISC unity
check method. The program typically looks at the worst loads on the legs due to wind
or seismic in the operating condition and then applies the AISC method of checking
the legs. The unity check must be less than or equal to 1.0. Most typical designs fall in
the 0.7 - 0.8 range, which is a good check both in terms of economy and safety.
4. Lug Support Check : In a similar manner to the leg check the program gathers the
worst loads on the support lugs and then evaluates them according to a set of accept-
able standards. In this case, gussets are checked by the AISC method and the lug
plates are checked by common industry standard methods. These methods are outlined
in common pressure design handbooks.
5. Baserings: With known forces and moments at the base and the geometry of the
basering, PVElite will analyze or design the basering and gusset geometry.
6. Flanges: For main body flanges, the program will compute the required thickness of
the flange, all relevant stresses, and MAWP for the given geometry. The results seen
in the output are based on the input thickness. The program additionally computes
the required thickness of the flange. Please note that the program does not include the
forces and moments to determine an equivalent design pressure. There are separate
fields in the input that can be entered in if these effects are to be considered. In order
to do this two runs would have to made. After run 1 was made the forces and moments
on the flange could be entered in as needed.
7. Nozzle Analysis : Complete nozzle evaluation is incorporated into the program based
on the rules in the ASME code. Design cases are made for Internal Pressure, External
Pressure and MAPnc. The internal pressure can be based on the MAWP of the entire
vessel or the exact pressure at the nozzle location. These options are located in the
Global Input section of the input. In addition to perpendicular nozzles, hillside geome-
tries are also considered. Nozzles at any angle can be entered in by using the
ANG=xx.x command in the nozzle description field. The nozzle analysis also com-
putes MDMT, weld size and strength calculations along with provisions for large noz-
zles as outlined in appendix 1-7 of the ASME Code.
Component Analysis
Once the program has completed the above calculations, the results may be reviewed in
the output processor. These results (such as required wall thickness vs. finished wall thick-
ness) may also be used for the evaluation of other components of the vessel. Rather than
automatically analyzing all the possible vessel element details, the output processor pro-
vides component analysis for only those details selected by the user. Other details that are
not part of the current vessel may also be analyzed here. This processor is described in the
next chapter.
&KDSWHU
Output / Review
Generating Output
Output may be reviewed or generated for any job that has some input. Results of any pre-
vious analysis, of course, are only available if the analysis has been run. To access the out-
put, first bring up the proper job through the File item on the Main Menu bar. Then,
clicking on Output on the Main Menu bar will produce a pull-down menu that controls the
program’s output. The pull-down menu provides two options:
• Review Report —Enters the Review processor where results of the analysis may be
inspected on the screen, printed, or copied to a file.
• Review the DXF File—Invokes a compatible DXF processor on the machine if one
exists.
The remainder of this chapter will focus on the many capabilities of the Review processor.
Once you have selected some reports, click on the Monitor icon to review them on the
screen or press the Printer icon to print them.
Note Once a report has been selected for screen viewing, it can be edited just as if it
were in a word processor. Comments can be added for clarity and entire lines and
parts of reports can be deleted or rearranged.
Using Review
The following screen shows a selected report:
Component Analysis
Analysis of vessel details is initiated from the Input Menu.
The units for the component analysis are extracted from the current vessel input. In the
example here, Half Pipes Jacket was selected. The initial screen is shown below.
&KDSWHU
Component Analysis Tutorial
File Menu
File Menu
The File Menu controls the general operations of PVElite files. Options that are displayed
in the menu with an ellipsis (…) cause a file manage window to appear when selected.
The File Menu may be used to
New
• New - Start a new file.
New Dialog
Open Dialog
When the Open option is chosen, the user is prompted to select an existing job file. Files of
type *.cci will be displayed for selection.
Save • Save - Save the current file in its present condition.
Save As Dialog
• Save As - Save a file that has not been previously named or save the current file under
another name.
Print • Print - Send the current vessel graphic image directly to a postscript or laser jet printer.
• Print Preview - Display the page that will be sent to the printer (see above).
• Print Setup - Display the standard Windows printer setup screen.
• Exit - Exit PVElite. A message window will appear to give the user a last opportunity
to save any modifications to the current job.
The File Menu will also list the last four vessel input files. Any of these files may be
opened with a mouse click.
Edit Menu
Edit Menu
Once a file is selected, the Edit Menu indicates the options available for editing. The Edit
Menu may be used to
• Title Page - Enter report title for a report.
• Insert Default Title Page - Insert a
• Project Data - Enter up to 3 title lines which appear at the top of each page of a printed
report.
Add New New
Insert Item • Add New Item - Add a new element.
Item
• Insert New Item - Insert a new element after the current element.
Insert New Item
Delete • Delete Current Item - Delete the current element.
Current
Item
• Select All - Select all of the items in the browse window.
Delete • Deselect All - Deselect all of the items in the browse window.
Current Item
Analysis Menu
Analysis Menu
The Analysis options enable the program to quit the input process and enter the analysis
process. PVElite will first save the current job to the input file with the same filename,
then process the analysis. The Analyze Menu may be used to
• Analyze Current Item- Perform calculations for the current analysis type. The analy-
sis program looks for appropriate data in the current analysis file and performs calcu-
lations, saving the results in a text file. The results of the analysis will then be ready
for display or printing.
• Analyze File - Allows the analysis of the input file.
Analyze File
• Analyze Selected Items - Perform calculations for selected analysis types. The calcu-
Analyze lations will be saved in a binary file and will be ready for display or printing.
Selected Item • Summary - Prepare a brief summary of data in the current analysis file.
• Choose Analysis Type - Select the type of component you wish to work on.
The analysis types chosen from this menu can also be selected from the Analysis Tool Bar
by simply clicking on the icon.
Output Menu
Output Menu
The Output option allows the user to review the analysis results and print the graphics of
the vessel. The Output Menu may be used to
• Review - Review the analysis results of the current job, if those results are available.
Tools Menu
Tools Menu
Configuration
• Configuration - This option allows the user to define a variety of system variables for
the program. The first screen of the Configuration menu looks like this:
The Computation Control Tab lets some specific program computation control parameters
be set. Following is a description of the options:
Compute Increased Nozzle Thickness? In many cases pressure vessels are designed
and built long before the piping system is attached to them. This means that the nozzle
loadings are unknown. If this field is checked, then your minimum nozzle thickness (trn)
will be the maximum of:
trn = (.134, trn for internal pressure) less than or equal Nps 18
trn = (OD/150, trn for internal pressure) greater than Nps 18
By using such a requirement in addition to UG-45, the piping designers will have some
additional metal to work with to satisfy thermal bending stresses in systems these vessels
are designed for. Note carefully, that these formulae are not in the ASME Code. They are
used in industry.
You can also specify the minimum wall thickness of the nozzle (Trn) in the Nozzle input.
If you do so, that will override this calculation.
Calculate F in Flohead if the Pressure is Zero? In the design of Floating heads, a
factor F is computed. The factor F is a direct function of the internal pressure. If the inter-
nal pressure is 0, then F is equal to 0. However, some interpret the Code to mean that F
should always be computed regardless of which case we are analyzing. Typically, the case
in question is the flange bolt up case. When bolting up the unit there is no internal pres-
sure. That is why the default is not checked.
If you wish F to always be considered in the thickness calcs, then check this box. This is
conservative.
Use P instead of MAWP for UG-99B? The Code paragraph UG-99(b) discusses the
subject of Hydrostatic test pressure on vessels. The equation that would normally be used
is as follows :
Test Pressure = 1.5 * MAWP * Stest/Sdesign (for A-98 addenda)
Or
Test Pressure = 1.3 * MAWP * Stest/Sdesign (for A-99 addenda & later)
The code in note 35 states that if the MAWP may be assumed to be the same as the design
pressure when calculations are not made to determine the MAWP.
This will allow for lower test pressures. This directive should be used with caution.
Perform Area Calculations for Small Nozzles? The Code paragraph UG-36 dis-
cusses the requirement of performing area placement calculations when small nozzles are
involved. The Code States:
Openings in vessels not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not require reinforce-
ment other than that inherent in the construction under the following conditions:
3.5" finished opening in a shell or head .375 inches thick or less
2.375" finished opening in a shell or head greater than .375 inches
If your geometry meets this criteria and this box is not checked, then no area of reinforce-
ment calculations will be performed.
Print Water Volume in Gallons/Liters? Normally the volumes computed by the pro-
gram are in diameter units.
If you want to use US gallons instead of cubic diameter units check this directive. The pro-
gram will use cubic units if the default value if it is not checked. For non-English units, the
volume will be printed in liters if this box is checked.
Use Calculated Value of M for Torispherical Heads in UG-45 b1? The Code in
paragraph UG-45 requires a calculation of the required head thickness at the location of
the nozzle. This may lead one to believe that the thickness may be computed per paragraph
UG-37. However a recent code interpretation states that the thickness should be computed
by the rules of paragraph UG-32 or by the rules in Appendix 1.Thus, this directive should
always be checked.
Use Pre-1999 Addenda? As of January 2000, the 1999 addenda of the ASME Code is
mandatory. This mandatory revision includes changes to the material properties of many
materials used for Division 1 vessel construction found in Section 2 Part D. Namely, the
allowable stresses were increased in certain ranges. PV Elite contains 2 databases of mate-
rial properties. The default behavior is to use the current higher allowable stress database.
If you are re-rating an older vessel to the pre-1999 addenda and would like to use the older
material allowables, then you should check this box.
Since the program uses this directive to connect to the database, it should be checked
before any vessel modeling occurs. In case of an existing file, you must access the material
database for each material on each element defined so far, to update material properties
per the selected database. Other design codes will not be affected by this directive.
Use Code Case 2260? Code Case 2260 Approval Date: May 20, 1998. This Code Case
is entitled "Alternate Design Rules for Ellipsoidal and Torispherical Formed Heads". It
applies for Section VIII Division 1. If this flag is checked then CodeCalc will use the mod-
ified equations in the Code Case to compute the required thickness of Elliptical/Torispher-
ical heads. The typical net result is that by using these modified rules, a thinner head will
designed.
Select the Addenda for the Material Database.
For Div, 1 the user can select between post 1999 material databases, up to the current
addenda. The default behavior is to use the current addenda database.
Miscellaneous Tab
The second screen of the Configuration Menu looks like this:
The Miscellaneous Tab of the Configuration Menu enables the user to select directives
that controls printout style, and default unit options. Following is a description of the
options:
Report Content. This directive allows the user to change the length of the printed
reports. When the summary option is checked, the formulas and substitutions will not be
printed out. Thus, this option will generate less paper and more compact reports. When the
detailed option is checked, the reports will be the normal length.
External Printout in Rows? There are 2 choices for the style of printing external pres-
sure results; rows and columns. Printing the values row wise tend to reduce the length of
the printouts. This is the default.
If you wish to use the column wise printout, do not check this directive.
Reload last file at startup? Check this box to automatically load the last file you were
working with when this processor is started.
Default units file. Select the system of units you typically prefer to work in.
• Set Unit - This option allows the user to change the current job’s units system. Once
this option is selected, a File Open dialog will appear and allow the user to select a
new units file. These units files have the extension .fil. English, Metric, Newton, Bars,
and SI units are available in the system subdirectory. After you select a units file, the
following window will appear:
If the units selection is acceptable, then click the OK button; otherwise, click Cancel.
After OK is clicked, the current units will be overlayed with the selected units.
• Make Unit - This option allows the creation of a custom units file. Simply pull down
the appropriate conversion constant or label and the corresponding unit or label will
change accordingly. If your conversion constant is not one of the choices, enter the
label and constant for your particular unit. (The program will continue to use English
units internally).
This window presents a table of items, the internal units used for each item, a conversion
factor, and the user units. The conversion factor is used to obtain the user units from the
internal units. The up and down arrow keys can be used to move the selection to the
desired item. If a desired unit conversion is not available as a default program selection, it
can be entered manually by typing it in. Insure that your conversion constants are correct
and that your labels go with the constants. Once all units have been set, press OK to exit
this screen and save the new units file. A safe place to save it would be in the system sub-
directory where the supplied units files are stored.
After you have saved the new units file, you will need to overlay the current units in your
job file with the new units. This option is the Set Unit option. After you set your file with
the new units, all of the entered data will be converted into the new set of units immedi-
ately.
• Calculator - This option allows the user to perform simple calculations and paste the
results in the input field in which the cursor resides.
Calculator
You can use the calculator to compute a number and transfer that number into PVElite by
using the Edit, Copy feature. From the desired field, right click and choose the Paste
option. Before pasting, ensure that the fields current contents have been removed.
• Units Conversion Viewer -
• Edit/Add Materials - Allows you to add materials to the COADE Material database.
The screen appears as follows:
To use this processor, fill in all of the values in all cells. If more than one material is to be
entered, use the Next button to enter the new material. After all materials have been
entered, save the file with the Save button. Finally, press the Merge key to join the user
defined material database with the supplied material database.
• Drawing Options - Allows the user to set the options for the graphics. Such as drawing
line thickness, font and the background color.
Diagnostics Menu
Diagnostics Menu
The Diagnostics Menu helps to troubleshoot problem installations. The following options
are available:
• CRC Check - This option performs a cyclic redundancy check on each of the supplied
PVElite files.
• Build Version - This option checks the revision level of the PVElite executable files.
• Error Review
• DLL Version Check - This option checks to make sure the PVElite .dll files are cur-
rent. Please note that if the dll’s are not current the program may behave in an unusual
manner or may not run at all.
• Register Servers - Sometimes the icons for various modules (Shells, Nozzles, Cones,
etc. ...) are grayed out, the user can enter the path to the PVElite installation directory
and select to register the DLLs. Then close the program and restart.(Does the icon
become active after this happens?
ESL Menu
ESL Menu
The ESL Menu gives access to utilities that interact with the External Software Lock. The
options are as follows:
• Show Data - This option will display the data stored on the ESL.
• Phone Update - This option will allow the user to obtain phone update authorization
information or other ESL changes, to be made over the phone.
• Generate Fax Codes - This option will provide the user with access codes for remote
ESL updating. These access codes should be sent to COADE for authorization codes.
• Enter Fax Authorization Codes - Choose this option to enter the remote authorization
codes you received from COADE. Each set of four codes will make one change to the
data stored on your ESL.
• Check HASP Driver Status - This option provides information about the ESL device
drivers.
• Install HASP Device Driver - This option installs the ESL device drivers.
View Menu
View Menu
The View Menu allows the user to move between the Input, Drawing, Quick Analysis, and
Browse views.
Help Menu
Help Menu
The Help Menu displays on-line help and information on how to obtain technical support
for PVElite. The options available are as follows:
• Help Topics - Starts the help facility.
• Online Documentation - Opens the Users Guide in Acrobat Reader.
• Desktop (online) Help - Starts an interactive help session with COADE personnel.
• Tip of the Day - Provides tips for running PVElite.
• Info - Provides information on the best ways to contact COADE personnel for techni-
cal support, and provides a link to COADE’s Web Site.
• About This Program
• On-Line Registration - Allows you to electronically register this product with
COADE.
Performing an Analysis
The remainder of this chapter will help you perform an actual analysis using the Shell pro-
gram.
Start PVElite by clicking on the icon on the desktop or selecting the item from Programs.
New From the Input menu click Component Analysis Data.
From the Main Menu click on File, New or click the New icon. This will allow you to
Add New Item specify the current analysis type. From the Analysis Toolbar, select Shells and Heads, then
click the Add New Item icon. The following screen will appear:
Shell analysis can be defined on the Design Tab of this screen. You can use the Tab or
Enter keys to move the cursor up and down the column of data. Notice also that many of
the fields have default values built in.
The first field on the input screen is the Item Number. A value must be entered in this field
or the analysis will not be performed. We suggest that you number the different calcula-
tions sequentially. Enter a 1 in this field (type 1 and press [Tab]).
The next field is for a description of the shell to be analyzed. This can be the part number
or a short description of the part. This field is optional. For this tutorial, type in Spherical
Head.
The next block of fields concern the pressure and temperature. Tab to the Design Internal
Pressure field and type 100 (assuming you are in English units). Now tab to the Design
Temperature for Internal Pressure field and type 700. When you press Tab, the program
will pause momentarily to check whether the material specified has allowable stresses
greater than zero at the temperature which you entered. Note that the allowable stress for
SA516-70 material is 18100 psi at this temperature. This is precisely the value that
PVElite extracted from the material database.
The Design External pressure for this problem is 15. The Design Temperature for External
pressure should be 650.
Now you are ready to enter the material. Let’s say this vessel is constructed of SA-516-70.
As you might expect, one way to enter that material is just to type it in the field. When you
do so, the program will check the database, and then update the allowable stresses. This
material happens to be the program default, but type the name anyway just to see what the
program does.
Another way to select a material is from the list of materials in the database. To see this
list, click the Material Database icon. The Material Database screen will appear showing
the materials list, which will look like this:
You can move the scroll bar up and down the screen and see the relevant properties for all
of the materials in the PVElite database or, from the Search String field type the material
name. Note that each major material classification is divided into columns. You can also
view the material parameters by clicking on the material name.
By clicking the OK button, the material name and the appropriate material parameters are
returned. These parameters may be reviewed and modified through the Material Edit win-
dow. To see this window, click the "A" button next to the material input.
By clicking the >> button, PVElite will scan the yield stress database for an exact material
match and fill in the appropriate yield stress at operating temperature. For many applica-
tions, this value is not needed.
In the Joint Efficiency, Longitudinal Seams field, enter the value of E, the longitudinal
joint efficiencies to be used in the calculator. For full radiography, choose a value of 1.
The next question asks if you would like to include Hydrostatic Head Components to our
vessel design. Click on the box to activate the dialog. The Hydrostatic Head dialog
appears and prompts you for a few items. The first item is the operating liquid density.
Enter a value of 38 lb/cu.ft. The next two fields request the height of the liquid column in
the operating position and the hydrotest position of the vessel. This particular vessel is a
horizontal drum that will be operating in a partially filled position. When the shop
hydrotests the vessel it will be filled and in the horizontal position. Enter values of 54 and
72 in. for these two fields. Click OK to get back to the main data input screen.
You can now click on the Geometry Tab of the input screen. The first field is the Type of
Shell or Head. Six options are shown on the pull-down, but if you need more details on
this field you can press [F1] for help.
We will analyze a hemispherical head, a cylinder and an elliptical head. These are compo-
nents of the particular horizontal vessel we are analyzing. First enter the Diameter Basis,
OD, for an Outside Diameter measurement (and calculation). Next, tab to the Diameter of
Shell/Head field and enter the diameter, 72 inches.
Now, enter the Minimum Thickness of Pipe or Plate, .5 inches, and the Nominal Thickness
of Pipe or Plate, .5 inches.
Enter 0.0625 inches for the Corrosion Allowance. Since the input fields have a calculator
capability, you could also enter the .0625 inch Corrosion Allowance as ‘1/16’.
For the Type of Reinforcing Ring, there is no reinforcing ring required for internal pres-
sure, so you can choose None from the pulldown list.
You have now completed the hemispherical head input. Your screen should look like this:
Note You may view the drawing of the current item at any time by clicking on the slider
at the right of the window and dragging it to the left.
Add New Item This horizontal tank has two more sections, the shell section and the elliptical head on the
other end. To add the new section, click the Add New Item icon. This will take you back
to the Design Tab of the input screen and prompt you to enter the second item.
Type in the number 2 in the Item Number field. Enter Cylind. Shell in the Description
Field. Click the Geometry Tab to enter the type of shell. Since this is a cylinder type, from
the pull down, select Cylindrical . A window will appear prompting for the Design Length
of Section and the Design Length for Cylinder Volume Calculations; enter 180 inches for
both. Click OK to resume.
Next, we will enter in the data for the elliptical head. Click on the Add New Item icon.
Type in the number 3 in the Item Number field and Elliptical head in the Description field.
Since the data from the previous element is brought forward, you will only have to modify
the shell/head type. Click on the Geometry Tab of the Input screen and from the Type of
Shell pulldown, select Elliptical. You will then be prompted for the head ratio. Enter the
number 2 for a 2:1 elliptical head. Click OK to continue.
Note When entering new components be sure to type in appropriate descriptions in the
description field. This will help make your finished reports more clear and easier
to follow.
Save You are now ready to analyze these three components for internal pressure and hydrostatic
head considerations. First, save the file. Now, click on the Analyze Item Icon on the anal-
Analyze Current ysis toolbar.
Item
Your screen will now look like this:
Next click the Analyze File Icon and you will be ready to review the results.
Analyze File
There are now three analyses in the output file. However, if you were to do additional runs
of the Shell program, or analyze nozzles, flanges, tubesheets, or anything else, those anal-
yses would also appear on this list. Thus you can review (and print) all of the calculations
View Reports you have done for a given vessel or job at one time. Select the first analysis, then select
View, Report from the menu, or click on the View Reports Icon. Your screen should look
like this:
You can scroll up and down in the text to see all of the input and results. Note especially
the Summary of Internal Pressure Results, where you can clearly see that the required
thickness is less than the actual thickness for this job, while the Maximum allowable
working pressure is greater than the design pressure. Therefore, the shell thickness you
selected is acceptable. After you finish reviewing the results, click the Done button to
return to the Available Reports Menu.
You may also select more than one analysis at a time by holding down the [Ctrl] key while
selecting the items to view. You can also select all reports by selecting Edit, Select All,
from the menu. When viewing the reports, click the Next Report Button to move to the
next component.
View The view below is the Microsoft Word view. If you want to return to the Home Screen,
Reports click the Output Processor menu option..
Using Word
Home Screen
Rev.A
= (100.00*(40.0000/2+0.0000))/(2*18100.00*1.00-0.2*100.00)
= (2*18100.00*1.00*(0.5000))/((40.0000/2+0.0000)+0.2*(0.5000))
= 900.50 psig
= (2*20000.00*1.00*0.5000)/(40.0000/2+0.2*0.5000)
= 995.02 psig
= (P*((D/2+CA)+0.2*(T-CA)))/(2*E*(T-CA))
= (100.00*((40.0000/2+0.0000)+0.2*(0.5000)))/(2*1.00*(0.5000))
= 2010.00 psi
= (100.00*(40.0000/2+0.0000))/(2*18100.00*1.00-0.2*100.00)
= (2*18100.00*1.00*(0.5000))/((40.0000/2+0.0000)+0.2*(0.5000))
= 900.50 psig
= (2*20000.00*1.00*0.5000)/(40.0000/2+0.2*0.5000)
= 995.02 psig
= (P*((D/2+CA)+0.2*(T-CA)))/(2*E*(T-CA))
= (100.00*((40.0000/2+0.0000)+0.2*(0.5000)))/(2*1.00*(0.5000))
= 2010.00 psi
= (100.00*(40.0000+2*0.0000)*1.00)/(2*18100.00*1.00-0.2*100.00)
= 0.1106 in.
= (2*18100.00*1.00*(0.5000))/(1.00*(40.0000+2*0.0000)+0.2*(0.5000))
= 451.37 psig
= (2*20000.00*1.00*0.5000)/(1.00*40.0000+0.2*0.5000)
= 498.75 psig
= (P*(K*(D+2*CA)+0.2*(T-CA)))/(2*E*(T-CA))
= (100.00*(1.00*(40.0000+2*0.0000)+0.2*(0.5000)))/(2*1.00*(0.5000))
= 4010.00 psi
&KDSWHU
The Shell Module
Introduction
The Shell module performs internal and external pressure design of vessel and exchanger
components using the rules in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, 2001, A-2001.
This module also considers static liquid head in the pressure design, performs stiffening
ring calculations, sizes stiffening rings, and computes weld shear flows on stiffening ring
welds.
Spherical Head or Shell UG-27 (d) (3) App 1-1 (a) (2)
Elliptical heads with aspect ratios between 1.0 and 3.0 (typically 2.0) may be analyzed.
Torispherical heads with knuckle radii between 6% and 100% of the crown radius may be
analyzed. Conical heads and sections with half apex angles up to 30 degrees may be ana-
lyzed. Reinforcement at the large and small ends of the cone should be analyzed in the
Conical Sections module. Welded flat heads, circular or non-circular, are analyzed in this
module. Bolted flat heads are analyzed in the Flange module. Bolted dished heads under
internal or external pressure are analyzed in the Floating Heads module.
Under external pressure, the module analyzes five types of heads or shells, using applica-
ble code formulae as follows:
All of these shell or head types are analyzed for diameter to thickness ratios greater than
10. Elliptical heads with aspect ratios between 1.0 and 3.0 may be analyzed. Torispherical
heads with any crown radius may be analyzed. Reinforcement at the large and small end of
conical heads or sections is analyzed in the Conical Sections module.
The Shell module takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness
and corrosion allowance, and the program adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making
calculations for the corroded condition. Figure 10A shows geometry for the Shell module.
In addition, the Shell module also accounts for static liquid head for shell components. For
carbon steel vessels, normalized material can be used for UCS-66 calculations.
allowable stress by hand, be sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with
the latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII Division 1 at the design
temperature.
Diameter Basis
If the vessel dimensions are specified on inside basis, pull down the ID selection. If the
dimensions are based on the vessels outside diameter select the OD selection. For flat
heads, this value is ignored. Always enter the outside diameter of the flat head.
Diameter of Shell/Head
Enter the diameter of the shell or head. For torispherical heads, enter the crown radius. For
flat heads, enter the outside diameter of the head. For cones, enter the largest diameter of
the cone. The program allows you to use either an inside diameter or an outside diameter.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the
inside diameter for the corrosion allowance you enter.
Results
Status Bar
In CodeCalc, the Status bar, which is located at the bottom of the application, is divided
into several panes, which compute and display critical results as the vessel is being mod-
eled. The information includes:
• Required Thickness Due to Internal Pressure
• Required Thickness Due to External Pressure
• Internal MAWP
• MDMT
• Warning Messages if the Stiffening Ring or the Welds Connecting It Fails
Important The PVElite program does not replace the given thickness with this
calculated minimum. If you are choosing the thickness for a compo-
nent, compare the values shown under “Summary of Internal Pres-
sure Results” (required vs. actual) and adjust the actual thickness up
or down accordingly.
Example Problems
Example problem 1 is an example cylinder design. This particular problem involves most
of the inputs available in the shell module. Note the form of the printout regarding the
external pressure calculations. This form of the output can be selected by first choosing
Tools from the Main Menu, and then selecting Configuration, Miscellaneous. Turn on the
flag to print the external calculations in rows. This form of the output report is preferred if
trying to conserve paper.
There are many more example problems. The PVElite input file CHECKS contain several
shell and head design examples taken directly from the ASME Code Appendices 1 and L.
PVElite Licensee: COADE ESL
FileName : SHELL ------------------------------------------- Page 1
Shell Analysis : SHELL SECTION ITEM: 1, 10:49am, 05/14/98
= (101.19*72.0000/2)/(16600.00*1.00+0.4*101.19)
= .2189 in.
&KDSWHU
The Nozzle Module
Introduction
This module calculates required reinforcement under internal pressure and performs fail-
ure path calculations for nozzles in shells and heads, using the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1 rules, 2001, A-2001.
The module evaluates nozzles at any angle (less than 90 degrees) away from the perpen-
dicular, allowing evaluation of off angle or hillside nozzles.
The Nozzle module takes full account of corrosion allowance. You enter actual thickness
and corrosion allowance, and the module adjusts thicknesses and diameters when making
calculations for the corroded condition.
The Nozzle module also performs UCS-66 MDMT calculations for nozzles.
Figure 11A shows geometry for the Nozzle module.
Nozzle Description
Enter a 15 character or less description of this nozzle. If you type in the description
“MANWAY” the UG-45 check for minimum nozzle neck thickness will not be performed.
Design Temperature
Enter the temperature associated with the design pressure. The PVElite program will
automatically update materials properties for BUILT-IN materials when you change the
design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses by hand, you are responsible to
update them for the given temperature.
Reinforcing Pad
If there is a reinforcing pad on the nozzle, or if you wish to specify the geometry for a rein-
forcing pad, check this field.
Note Although PVElite will design and recommend a reinforcing pad if one is needed,
the analysis of areas is based only on what you have entered. If PVElite recom-
mends a pad or a larger pad than the one you enter, you must go back into input
and enter a pad of the correct size in order for the final configuration to be
reflected in the final analysis.
size calculations per UW-16(d)(1). The Code exempts these calculations per paragraph
UW-15 when one of the above weld classifications such as "A" is used. If you wish
PVElite to perform the weld strength calculation regardless of the type of weld geometry,
leave this field blank.
Hillside nozzles and some angular nozzles are subject to calculations to meet area require-
ments in both planes of reinforcement. In these cases CodeCalc automatically checks the
area requirements in both the planes using the corresponding lengths of the nozzle open-
ing. For integral construction, the Code F correction factor of 0.5 will automatically be
applied in the hillside direction. If the connection is pad reinforced, a value of 1.0 will be
used. The F factor is used to account for the fact that the longitudinal stress is one half of
the hoop stress. The use of the F factor is limited to nozzles located on cylindrical and con-
ical sections. A hill-side nozzle example based on ASME VIII Div 1 Appendix L-7.7 is
illustrated in the CHECKS file under the PVElite examples directory - Nozzle items 10
and 11.
Some examples are shown below.
Y angle or lateral nozzles can be specified in case of conical and cylindrical sections by
clicking on the "Is Lateral..." checkbox. In this case only the vessel-nozzle centerline
angle needs to be specified. The following figure shows an example.
For users of version prior to 6.40 the input specification for non-radial and non-hillside
nozzles has changed. The current requirement is the angle between the centerline of the
nozzle and the centerline of the vessel.
Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or Pad
Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the nozzle and the pad or shell.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pad. Any allowances for external corrosion should be taken into
account for the pad thickness.
etration weld, or just a fillet weld, enter the depth of the partial penetration or a zero,
respectively, in this field.
Discussion of Results
Status Bar
In CodeCalc, the Status bar, which is located at the bottom of the application, is divided
into several panes, which compute and display critical results as the vessel is being mod-
eled. The information includes:
• Reinforcement Area Contributions, Available Area, Required Area
• MDMT
• Warning Messages if UG-45 Fails
Note The program takes into account the case where the nozzle passes through a weld
by asking the joint efficiency of the weld, if any.
Note The program uses dl-d, (Diameter limit minus inside hole radius) in the calculate
for area available in shell. This is because the Code wrongly assumes that the dl-d
is always equal to d, which is only true when the natural diameter limit is used.
Since we allow the user to enter a reduced diameter limit, we could not use the
pure Code equation.
Example Problems
The \example directory contains the input for most of the other example problems for noz-
zles shown in Appendix L of the Code. The file these examples are contained in is
CHECKS. Some large nozzle examples are included in LG_NOZZLE.CCI.
Areas per UG-37.1 but with DL = Diameter Limit, DLR = Corroded ID:
Area Available in Shell (A1):
A1 = (DL-DLR)*(ES*(T-CAS)-TR)-2*(THK-CAN)*(ES*(T-CAS)-TR)*(1-FFR1)
A1 = (44.986-22.493)*(1.00*(.9900-.313)-.623)-2*(1.066-.313)
*(1.00*(.9900-.3125)-.6233)*(1.0-.86)
A1 = 1.207 sq.in.
A4WP = WO^2*FFR3+(WI-CAN/0.707)^2*FFR2+WP^2*FFR4
A4WP = .5000^2 * .86 + ( .0000 )^2 * .86 + .6250^2 * 1.00
A4WP = .605 sq.in.
WELD STRENGTH AND WELD LOADS PER UG-41.1, SKETCH (a) OR (b)
W = (AR-A1+2*(THK-CAN)*FFR1*(E1(T-CAS)-TR))*S
W = ( 7.0775 - 1.2066 + 2 * ( 1.0660 - .3125 ) * .8571 *
( 1.00 * ( .9900 - .3125) - .6233 ) ) * 17500
W = 103965. lb.
W1 = (A2+A5+A4-(WII-CAN/.707)^2*FFR2)*S
W1 = ( 1.8443 + 4.3750 + .6049 - .1953 * .86 ) * 17500
W1 = 116494. lb.
W2 = (A2+A3+A4+(2*(THK-CAN)*(T-CAS)*Fr1))*S
W2 = ( 1.8443 + .0000 + .2143 + .8751 ) * 17500
W2 = 51340. lb.
W3 = (A2+A3+A4+A5+(2*(THK-CAN)*(T-CAS)*Fr1))*S
W3 = ( 1.8443 + .0000 + 4.3750 + .6049 + .8751 ) * 17500
W3 = 134739. lb.
TPGW = (PI/2.0)*DLO*WGPN*0.74*SEG
TPGW = ( 3.1416 / 2.0 ) * 24.0000 * .6250 * 0.74 * 15000
TPGW = 261538. lb.
Path 2-2 = 530851. lb., must exceed W = 103965. lb. or W2 = 51340. lb.
Path 3-3 = 391742. lb., must exceed W = 103965. lb. or W3 = 134739. lb.
&KDSWHU
The Flange Module
Introduction
The PVElite Flange module calculates actual and allowable stresses for all types of
flanges designed and fabricated to the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1. The module
uses the Code rules found in Appendix 2 of the 2001 Code, A-2001.
The stresses on a given flange are determined entirely by the bending moment on the
flange. All the loads on the flange produce bending in the same direction (i.e., coun-
terclockwise) and this bending is resisted by the ring behavior of the flange, and in
integral flanges by the reaction of the pipe.
5. Based on the flange type (Code Figure 2-4) calculate hub factors and other geometry
factors for the flange. These are found in Code figures 2-7.1, 2-7.2, 2-7.3, 2-7.4, 2-7.5,
and 2-7.6. Formulae are also given in the Code so that computer programs can consis-
tently arrive at the answers that are normally selected from charts in the appendix.
These formulae are implemented in the PVElite flange program.
6. Calculate stress formula factors based on the geometry factors and flange thickness.
7. Finally, calculate flange stresses using the stress formula factors and the bending
moments. Compare these stresses to the allowable stresses for the flange material.
S = k(geometry)*M/t^2
That is, a constant dependant on the flange geometry times the bending moment,
divided by some thickness squared, either the thickness of the flange or the thick-
ness of the hub.
The calculation procedures and format of results in this program are similar to those given
in “Modern Flange Design,” Bulletin 503, Edition VII, published by Taylor Forge.
The Flange module includes the capability to analyze a given flange under the bolting
loads imposed by a mating flange. The module also takes full account of corrosion allow-
ance. You enter uncorroded thicknesses and diameters which the program adjusts before
performing the calculations. The module can treat corrosion in a special manner based on
the input of a Yes/No question in the input.
The module can also be used for two levels of flange design. The PARTIAL option forces
the program to calculate the minimum flange thickness for a given geometry. The
DESIGN option forces the program to select all of the relevant flange geometry including
bolt circle, number of bolts, outside diameter, thickness, and hub geometry.
Flange Number
Enter the flange ID number. It is recommended that the flange numbers start at 1 and
increase sequentially. If this field is left blank PVElite will assume there is no data here to
be analyzed. The only exception to this is the first element, if an analysis is attempted and
the item number is blank, PVElite will assign a value of 1 to the item number.
Flange Designation
Enter an alpha-numeric tag for this flange. This entry is optional.
When performing a partial analysis, PVElite iterates for the required thickness of the
flange. The final set of results you see is made using the final required thickness.
If you would like to see the results using the input thickness, then enter a colon “:” as the
last character in the description. In both cases, PVElite will determine the required thick-
ness.
Flange Type
Enter the flange type number for this flange. Flange types are
• Integral Weld Neck
• Integral Slip On
• Integral Ring
• Loose Slip On
• Loose Ring
• Lap Joint
• Blind
• Reverse
There are essentially only two categories of flanges for purposes of analysis. These are
integral type flanges, where the flange and the vessel to which it is attached behave as a
unit, and loose types, where the flange and the vessel do not behave as a unit. Within these
categories, however, there are several additional subdivisions.
Slip-on Flanges
These have hubs, and are normally analyzed as loose type flanges. To qualify as integral
type flanges they required a penetration weld between the flange and the vessel.
Ring Flanges
These do no have a hub, though they frequently have a weld at the back of the flange. They
are normally analyzed as loose, but may be analyzed as integral if a penetration weld is
used between the flange and the vessel.
Analysis Type
Enter the analysis type for the computations to be performed on this flange.
Analyze
For this analysis type, the complete flange definition must be given by the user. The pro-
gram will compute the resulting stresses.
Partial
For this analysis type, all information except for the flange thickness must be specified.
The program will select a flange thickness such that the resulting flange stress equals the
allowable stress.
Design
For this analysis type, only the flange diameter and thickness, gasket and flange face
geometry, and gasket properties are specified. The program computes all other flange
dimensions and stresses.
Design Pressure
Enter the internal design pressure. If the value entered in this field is negative, it will be
treated as external pressure.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for the flange. This temperature will be used to interpolate
the material allowable tables and external pressure curves.
Caution You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Caution You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
Flange Thickness
Enter the flange thickness. The corrosion allowance will be subtracted from this value.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance for this flange. The value entered here will be subtracted
from the flange and hub thicknesses to obtain the thicknesses actually used in the compu-
tations.
Flange ID
Enter the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be the
inner pipe diameter. This value is refereed to as “B” in the ASME code. The corrosion
allowance will be used to adjust this value - two times the corrosion allowance will be
added to the uncorroded ID given by the user). For a blind flange this entry should be 0.
Flange OD
Enter the outer diameter of the flange. This value is referred to as “A” in the ASME code.
Shell Material
Select the shell material name. This is used for computing the longitudinal hub allowable
stress for optional type flanges that are analyzed as integral.
Hub Length
Enter the hub length. This value is refereed to as “h” in the ASME code. For flange geom-
etries without hubs, this length may be entered as zero. When analyzing an optional type
flange that is welded at the hub end, the hub length should be the leg of the weld, and the
thickness at the large end should include the thickness of the weld. When you analyze a
flange with no hub, i.e. a ring flange, a lap joint flange, etc., you should enter zero for the
hub length, the small end of the hub, and the large end of the hub. However, when you
design as a loose flange a ring flange which has a fillet weld at the back, enter the size of a
leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub. This will insure that the program designs
the bolt circle far enough away from the back of the flange to get a wrench around the
nuts.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry: 1 - TEMA Bolt Table, 2 - UNC Bolt Table, 3 - User
specified root area of a single bolt.
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis.
Gasket Materials and Contact Facings, TABLE 2-5.1
Gasket Factor Seating Stress Facing Column
Gasket Material (m) (y)
Self Energizing Types, including
metallic and elastomer O ring 0.00 0 II
Flat Elastomers
Below 75A Shore Durometer 0.50 0 II
75A Shore Durometer or higher 1.00 200 II
Grooved metal
Soft aluminum 3.25 5500 II
Soft copper or brass 3.50 6500 II
Iron or soft steel 3.75 7600 II
Monel or 4-6% Chrome 3.75 9000 II
Stainless Steel 4.25 10100 II
Ring Joint
Iron or soft steel 5.50 18000 I
Monel or 4-6% Chrome 6.00 21800 I
Stainless Steel 6.50 26000 I
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d
(PVElite equivalents 3 and 4).
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c,
1d, 2 and 6 (PVElite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin
width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
The program then uses the equivalent pressure as the design pressure.
Caution The use of mating flange values for bolt design calculations will
result in incorrect MAWP calculations.
Note You probably don’t want to calculate MAWP based on the mating flange values,
but rather based on the values developed by this flange at a given pressure. Also
you definitely don’t want to do “design” when you have a mating flange, since the
program will certainly pick a different bolt circle, etc. than the one chosen for the
other flange. You can however, do a partial (thickness) design.
Axial Force
Enter the magnitude of the external axial force which acts on this flange.
Bending Moment
Enter the magnitude of the external bending moment which acts on this flange.
Discussion of Results
Status Bar
In CodeCalc the Status bar, which is located at the bottom of the application, is divided
into several panes, which compute and display critical results as the vessel is being mod-
eled. The information includes:
Required Thickness due to pressure
MAWP (minimum of operating and seating conditions)
Where:
Sfo = ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at operating temperature.
Sfa = ASME Code Allowable Stress for flange material at ambient temperature.
Sbo = ASME Code Allowable Stress for bolt material at operating temperature.
Sba = ASME Code Allowable Stress for bolt material at ambient temperature.
Note At low pressures the stress due to gasket seating is not a function of the design
pressure. At higher pressures the stress is a function of pressure, and the MAWP
can be calculated as described above, except that the extrapolation is from the
point where pressure comes into the calculation of the seating stress.
The program calculates the Gasket Seating MAWP and Operating MAWP based on
the input geometry and pressure. In theory both MAWPs should be independent of the
input pressure. However, because of the extrapolation algorithm, the estimate of the
MAWP may depend on the pressure slightly (when the pressure is very small). Please
note that in Partial or Design mode, the program will calculate MAWP based on the
required flange thickness.
Flange Design
The geometry defined by the user is the basis for the design performed by the program.
Specifically, the inside diameter, materials, pressure, gasket geometry and gasket proper-
ties remain fixed throughout the design. Beginning from this point, the program uses the
following approach to design the rest of the flange:
1. For slip-on type flanges, calculate the small end of the hub equal to roughly the
thickness required for the design pressure
2. For weld neck, slip-on, and reverse flanges, calculate the large end of the hub as
the small end of the hub plus 1/16th (for small end thicknesses less than one inch)
or 1/8th (for small end thicknesses greater than one inch). Then calculate a hub
length equal to the small end thickness plus the minimum slope (3:1) for the hub.
The effect of these choices is to design a small hub when compared with standard-
ized flanges. This has the additional effect of keeping the moment arms and diam-
eters (of the bolt circle and flange OD) small, and keeping the flange light.
Finally, the selection of a small hub keeps the amount of machining required for
the flange to a minimum.
3. Select a preliminary number of bolts. This is a multiple of four based on the diam-
eter of the flange. The algorithm chosen tends to select more and smaller bolts
than would be found on standard flanges. This also has the effect of minimizing
the flange outside diameter and the weight of the flange.
4. Select a bolt size that will give the required bolt area for this number of bolts.
5. Using this bolt size, calculate a final number of bolts based on:
• The area required divided by the area available per bolt -OR-
• The maximum allowed spacing between bolt of this size.
6. Using this number of bolts, calculate the bolt circle base on:
• The OD of the hub plus the minimum ID spacing of the bolt -OR-
• The OD of the gasket face plus the actual size of the bolt -OR-
• The minimum spacing distance between the bolts -OR-
• For reverse flanges, the vessel OD plus the bolt ID spacing.
7. Calculate the outside diameter of the flange based on the bolt circle plus the mini-
mum edge spacing for the bolt size chosen.
8. For flanges with full face gaskets, adjust the gasket and face outside diameter for
the values chosen, and recalculate the moment arms for the flange.
9. Finally (and this step also applies to partial design of the flange), select a thick-
ness for the flange and calculate the stresses. If the stress is not equal to the allow-
able, adjust the thickness based on the difference between the actual and allowable
stresses, and then repeat the stress calculation. This process continues until the
actual stress for one of the stress components is equal to the allowable stress.
Example Problems
The example problem presented below is taken from “Modern Flange Design,” Page 12.
This problem is the calculation of stresses for a typical weld neck flange.
The results from the example problem agree very well with the Taylor Forge results. The
detailed calculations on the second and third pages of the printout show the formulas and
substitutions for the loads, distances and stresses calculated by the program.
There are several additional example problems included in the files CHECKS, FEXAM-
PLE & FEXAMPL2.
COADE Verification Problem Set
PVElite Licensee: COADE ENGINEERING SOFTWARE, INC. HOUSTON
FileName : CHECKS -------------------------------- Page 1
Flange Analysis : TAYLOR FORGE ITEM: 1, 03:31pm, 05/18/98
&KDSWHU
The Conical Sections Module
Introduction
The PVElite Conical Sections Module performs internal and external pressure design of
conical sections and stiffening rings using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules,
2001, A-2001.
Cone Number
Enter an ID number for the Cone. This may be the item number on the drawing, or num-
bers that start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Cone Description
Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
change the design temperature. The design external pressure at this temperature is a com-
pletely different design case than the internal pressure case. Therefore this temperature
may be different than the temperature for internal pressure. Many external pressure charts
have both lower and upper limits on temperature. If your design temperature is below the
lower limit, use the lower limit as your entry to the program. If your temperature is above
the upper limit the component may not be designed for vacuum conditions.
Note Whichever option is chosen you will be prompted to enter a reinforcing material.
If there is no reinforcing material, enter the small end shell material. The values
for the elasticity and allowable stress values will be needed for the area and inertia
calculations depending on the value of Delta.
Note Whichever option is chosen you will be prompted to enter a reinforcing material.
If there is no reinforcing material, enter the large end shell material. The values
for the elasticity and allowable stress values will be needed for the area and inertia
calculations depending on the value of Delta.
Note This section is shown even when the internal design pressure is zero: the required
thicknesses will be zero, but the Maximum Allowable Working Pressures will be
meaningful.
Next the program summarizes these internal pressure results, adding the corrosion allow-
ances as necessary.
The PVElite program will set the area required in the reinforcing ring to zero if either the
allowed apex angle is higher than the actual apex angle or the area available in the shell is
greater than the area required.
Example Problems
Example Problem #1
Example problem 1 is taken from the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix L,
L-3, Example 3. The Code example problem requests determination of the required thick-
ness for the knuckle and cone with a small end diameter of 200 inches and a half apex
angle of 30 degrees. The cone is to be designed for 50 psi internal pressure. Agreement
with the required thickness per the Code is exact. Page 2 of the printout is included to
illustrate the detailed calculations for internal pressure.
These examples are contained in the file CHECKS.
Example Problem #2
The second example problem illustrates the calculation of a cone under external pressure.
This example is also taken from the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix L,
L-3.3. The cone is similar to the one used in Example 1, but under external pressure.
Agreement with the example problem results for area of reinforcement required, area
available in shell, area available in reinforcing ring and the moment of inertia of the rein-
forcement is good at both the large and small ends of the cone. The third page of the print-
out is included to show the detailed calculations for external pressure at the large and
small ends. Note that beginning from A-95, the code’s computation has good agreement
with PVElite for this example.
Cone Material
Cone Allowable Stress at Temperature SAC 15000.00 psi
Cone Allowable Stress At Ambient SOC 17500.00 psi
Joint Efficiency of Cone EC .8500
Actual Thickness of Cone TC 1.2500 in.
Corrosion Allowance for Cone CAC .0000 in.
Example Problem #3
The third example shows the calculation for moment of inertia with knuckles. The avail-
able I is less than the required because the resulting neutral axis is very close to the shell/
knuckle (cone) juncture.
&KDSWHU
The Floating Head Module
Introduction
The PVElite Floating Head Module performs internal and external pressure design of
spherically dished covers (bolted heads) using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1
rules, 2001, A-2001.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for each head. This temperature will be used to interpolate
the material allowable tables and external pressure curves.
Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not con-
tained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by select-
ing Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Caution You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
When you change the design temperature, or the thickness of the
head, the program will automatically update this field, but only for
BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be
sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with the latest
edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the
design temperature.
Caution You should double check your entry to assure conformance with the
latest edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D.
When you change the design temperature, or the thickness of the
head, the program will automatically update this field, but only for
BUILT-IN materials. If you enter the allowable stress by hand, be
sure to double check your entry to assure conformance with the latest
edition of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code Section II Part D at the
design temperature.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry:
• TEMA Bolt Table
• UNC Bolt Table
• User specified root area of a single bolt
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis. Note that the number of bolts is
almost always a multiple of four.
FACING PVElite
DESCRIPTION
SKETCH EQUIVALENT
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d
(PVElite equivalents 3 and 4).
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c,
1d, 2 and 6 (PVElite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin
width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
Discussion of Results
Internal Pressure Results for the Head
The ASME Code provides a simple formula for calculating the required thickness of the
head under internal pressure. This formula is the same for type b, c, and d heads:
t = 5PL/6S
The program solves this formula for required thickness, maximum allowable working
pressure, and actual stress, and displays the results. Note that these results are also dis-
played in the thickness summary at the end of the printout.
Soehren’s Calculations
The ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-6, paragraph (h) states:
These formulas are approximate in that they do not take into account continuity between
the flange ring and the dished head. A more exact method of analysis which takes this into
account may be used if it meets the requirements of U-2.
The analysis referred to in this paragraph is the Soehren’s calculation, based on the paper
“The Design of Floating Heads for Heat-Exchangers”, ASME 57-A-7-47. Intermediate
results and calculated stresses are shown in the printout. Equation numbers are included
from the original paper. Allowable stresses are not shown in the printout, but bending
stresses should be limited to 1.5 times the basic Code allowable stress, while membrane
stresses should be limited to 1.0 times the basic Code allowable.
Example Problems
The following 2 examples show the same floating head subjected to internal and external
pressure. Separate runs have been made to clarify the individual calculations. These exam-
ples are included in the CHECKS file.
Example Problem #1
Example Problem #2
&KDSWHU
The Horizontal Vessel Module
Introduction
This chapter discusses the Horizontal Vessel module of the PVElite program. To use the
Horizontal Vessel module the current analysis type should be Horizontal Vessel. This
module computes stresses in horizontal pressure vessels created by the combination of
internal pressure and the weight of the vessel, its contained liquid and stiffener rings. If
included in the analysis, additional loads due to wind per ASCE-95 or 93 and earthquake
will be included. The module is based on “Stresses in Large Horizontal Cylindrical Pres-
sure Vessels on Two Saddle Supports”, The Welding Research Supplement, 1951 and sub-
sequent interpretations of that work. This is also termed Zick’s Analysis.
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Vessel Number
Enter the vessel number for this analysis. This number can be up to 15 digits in length.
Vessel Description
Any combination up to 15 letters and numbers can be used to briefly identify the vessel
that is being analyzed. This description is reflected in the output reports and is used in
error checking.
If you want to use the factor 6.0 instead of 1.5 for the saddle reaction force FWT (due to
wind load) or FST (due to seismic load) (equation for Q2 per D. Moss “Pressure Vessel
Design Manual” p.109), you need to type the single character “:” at the very end of this
input field for description. It is generally conservative to use the factor of 6. The program
uses 1.5 as default.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the allowance given for corrosion in this field. The corrosion allowance cannot be
greater than the vessel wall thickness. In addition, it must be greater than 0.
Material Specification
Enter the material specification for the shell section of the horizontal vessel. An example
of a material type is SA-516 70. Define the material by typing in the name. Alternatively,
the material can be selected from the material data base by right clicking and selecting
Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not contained in the data base, its
specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materi-
als, from the Main Menu.
Extra Weight
Enter any additional weight present on the vessel. Additional weight may come from insu-
lation, steel structures or piping loads. There is no on screen range checking for this entry
since it may be positive or negative. However, if negative, this entry should not be greater
than the total weight of the vessel.
Shell Diameter
Enter the shell diameter with respect to the shell and head diameter basis. The diameter
must be greater than 0 and greater than 2.0 times the wall thickness.
Shell Thickness
Enter the uncorroded thickness of the shell in this cell. PVElite will automatically corrode
the wall thickness as necessary.
Head Type
Enter the type of head that is used on the vessel ends. If a flat head is selected then it is
assumed to be round and the same diameter as the shell. The acceptable range of input is
between 1 and 4.
Head Thickness
Enter the uncorroded thickness of the head. The value must be greater than 0.0. Effects of
corrosion are handled automatically.
Saddle Width
Enter the width of the surface on the saddle support that will contact the vessel.
Number of Ribs
Enter the number of ribs in your design. This number should include the outside ribs.
Thickness of Ribs
Enter the thickness of the ribs. The ribs run in a direction that is parallel to the long axis of
the vessel. Any external corrosion allowance should be taken into account when this value
is entered.
Thickness of Web
Enter the thickness of the Webs. The webs run in a direction perpendicular to the long axis
of the vessel. Any external corrosion should be taken into account when this value is
entered.
Force Coefficient
Enter the force coefficient for vessel here. The acceptable range of input is between 0.5
and 1.2. This can be seen as Table 12 in ANSI A58.1. For ASCE 7-95, refer to p32-33.
Additional Area
The user may wish to consider the additional area exposed to the wind from piping, plat-
forms, insulation etc. PVElite will automatically compute an effective diameter with the
input diameter known.
requirements, so check those carefully. The wind pressure will be multiplied by the area
calculated by the program to get a shear load and a bending moment.
If you enter a positive number in here, PVElite will use this number regardless of the
information in the following cells.
Importance Factor ( I )
Enter the value for the importance factor here. The importance factor accounts for the
degree of hazard to life and property. If the vessel is 100 miles ( 160 kilometers ) from the
hurricane oceanline enter a 1.00. If the vessel is at the hurricane oceanline enter 1.05. Val-
ues up to 1.11 are acceptable here. Refer to ASCE #7 and ANSI 58.1 for more information
on the importance factor (Table 1 and Table 5 in ANSI A58.1). For ASCE 7-95, refer to
Table 6-2).
Wind Exposure
Enter an integer here for the ASCE 7 wind exposure factor.
Exposure (A)- “Large city centers with at least 50% of the buildings having a height in
excess of 70 ft.”
Exposure (B)- “Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other terrain with numerous
closely spaced obstructions having the size of single family dwellings.”
Exposure (C)- “Open terrain with scattered obstructions having heights generally less
than 30 feet. This category includes flat, open country and grasslands.”
Exposure (D)- “Flat, unobstructed costal areas directly exposed to wind flowing over
large bodies of water.”
Types of Hill
Enter the type of hill. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for details.
• None
• 2-D Ridge
• 2-D Escarpment
• 3-D Axisym. Hill
Seismic Zone
Enter the seismic zone in which your vessel is operating. The seismic zones are pictured in
ASCE #7. A value of 0 will not increase the saddle reaction force. A zone entry of 4 will
produce the highest saddle load reactions.
Discussion of Results
PVElite will determine the volume of the vessel as well as the empty and full weights.
These weights are computed with the vessel in the corroded condition. Knowing the
weights may be useful for cost estimating and for design of supporting attachments, such
as lifting lugs.
The longitudinal stresses displayed in the output include the stress effects due to internal
pressure. Since these are normal stresses they add together. The tension allowable is the
basic operating allowable times the joint efficiency. The compressive allowable is the fac-
tor B taken from UG-23 using the materials chart for the given material.
The tangential shear in the shell varies depending on whether the shell is stiffened or the
head acts as a stiffener, or neither of these cases. Tangential stress in the head only exists if
the head is close enough to the saddle to be used as a stiffener. The allowable stress in
shear is 80% of the allowable tensile stress for the head or shell.
The stress at the horn of the saddle depends on the location of the saddle and the equiva-
lent thickness of the saddle and wear pad. It is zero if the shell is stiffened by rings. This
stress is always compressive and the allowable stress is -1.5 times the allowable tensile
stress.
Use of the head as a stiffener creates additional tension stress in the head. The allowable
additional stress in the vessel head is limited to 0.25 times the allowable tension stress in
the head. If pressure is added, the resulting stress must be less than 1.25 times the allow-
able tensile stress.
If the tip of the stiffening ring is in compression its allowable will be -0.5 times the yield
stress. If a tensile condition exists the basic material allowable will be used.
Conclusions
The conclusions drawn in this paper are
• The peak stress in the vessel at the saddle horn can be reduce from 15 to 40 percent
when a wear plate is used if the wear plate has the same thickness as the vessel and
extends at least 5 degrees above the saddle horn.
• The peak stress in the vessel remains at the saddle horn when using a thin wear plate.
• The stress reduction does not vary greatly with a variation in saddle support angle.
• A welded wear plate reduces stresses better than a non-welded wear plate.
Figure 15B - Wear Plate and Saddle Detail for a Typical Horizontal Tank
Example Problem
Required Actual
Shell Thickness, Reqd. vs. Actual .936 .941 in.
Head Thickness, Reqd. vs. Actual .929 .929 in.
Shell M.A.W.P. , Reqd. vs. Actual 300.00 301.47 psig
Head M.A.W.P. , Reqd. vs. Actual 300.00 300.15 psig
Actual Allowable
Long. Stress at Top of Saddles 8776.65 17500.00 psi
Long. Stress at Bottom of Saddles 8337.89 17500.00 psi
Long. Stress at Top of Midspan 5041.68 17500.00 psi
Long. Stress at Bottom of Midspan 12072.86 17500.00 psi
= 219.38 psi
Tangential Shear in Shell near Saddle
= Q * K.4 * (( L-H-2A )/( L+H ))/( R*(TS-CA))
= 188991 * 1.1707 * (( 66.00 - 2.25 - 2 * 2.50 )/
( 66.00 + 2.25 ))/( 54.0590 * ( .9410 - .0000 ))
= 3743.68 psi
Y A AY Ay^2 Io
Shell .4705 21.7619 10.2390 4.8174 1.6058
Wearplate 1.1285 4.5000 5.0782 5.7308 .0527
Web 4.4080 3.0920 13.6295 60.0790 9.8537
BasePlate 7.7500 6.0000 46.5000 360.3750 .1250
Totals 13.7570 35.3539 75.4468 431.0023 11.6372
Fh = ( K1 * Q ) = 38463.8400 lb.
e = ( BPLEN - 1 ) / ( NRIBS - 1)
e = ( 60.0000 - 1 ) / ( 5 - 1 ) = 14.7500 in.
AP = e * BPWID / 2
AP = 14.7500 * 12.0000 / 2 = 88.5000 sq.in.
P = AP * BP
P = 88.5000 * 262.4880 = 23230.1900 lb.
SC = P/AR
SC = 23230.1900 / 8.9375 = 2599.1820 psi
&KDSWHU
The TEMA Tubesheet Module
Introduction
The PVElite TEMA Tubesheet Module performs tubesheet thickness analysis for all
tubesheet types, including fixed tubesheet exchangers, based on the Standards of the
Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer’s Association, 8th Edition, 2001.
Tubesheet Type
The program analyzes the following tubesheet types:
A Stationary tubesheets, gasketed on both sides.
B Stationary tubesheets, integral with the shell.
C Stationary tubesheets, integral with the channel.
N Stationary tubesheets, integral on both sides.
U U-tube tubesheets gasketed on both sides
V U-tube tubesheets integral with the channel.
U-tube tubesheets integral with the shell.
P Floating tubesheets, outside packed floating head.
S Floating tubesheets, head with backing device.
shellside, except for fixed tubesheet exchangers. In this case any number greater than zero
serves as a flag to tell the program to turn on the special differential design pressure rules
for fixed tubesheets. You must enter the shell side and tube side design pressures for fixed
tubesheet exchangers.
Tubesheet Thickness
Enter the thickness of the tubesheet, or a reasonable guess at the thickness if the actual
thickness is unknown. This thickness should include any allowances for corrosion on the
shell side or the tube side. The tubesheet thickness for fixed tubesheet exchangers is also
used in the equivalent thermal pressure calculation. When you have finished your design
you should come back and put the actual thickness into this field and make sure the
required thickness doesn’t change.
Tubesheet Corrosion Allowance Shell Side
Enter the tubesheet corrosion allowance for the shell side. This value is combined with the
tubesheet corrosion allowance shell side to calculate the corroded thickness of the
tubesheet.
Number of Tubes
Enter the number of tubes in the tubesheet. This value is used to determine the total tube
area and stiffness.
Length of Tubes
Enter the overall length of the tubes, the length from the inside face of one tubesheet to the
inside face of the other tubesheet. This value is used to determine the thermal expansion of
the tubes.
8 .165 18 .049
10 .134 19 .042
11 .120 20 .035
12 .109 22 .028
13 .095 24 .022
14 .083 26 .018
15 .072 27 .016
16 .065
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of K and SL are required.
Where,
k: Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. Here are the different values of k:
k Condition
For the worst case scenario enter the values of K and SL, that give a maximum combina-
tion of k*SL. SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first
baffle or the tube span between two support baffles.
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of K and SL are required.
Where,
k: Tube end condition corresponding to the span SL. Here are the different values of k:
For the worst case scenario enter the values of K and SL, that give a maximum combina-
tion of k*SL. See above for possible values of k.
Load
Load Case Description
Case #
Corroded Uncorroded
1 Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca
2 Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca
3 Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca
4 Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca
5 Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca
6 Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca
7 Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca
8 Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca
Note:
Fts, Fvs - User-defined shell side and tube side vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, Pt - Shell side and tube side design pressures.
Th - With or without thermal expansion.
Ca - With or without corrosion allowance.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry: 1 - TEMA Bolt Table 2 - UNC Bolt Table 3 - User
specified root area of a single bolt
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis.
the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point
of the gasket.
Facing PVElite-
Description
Sketch Equivalent
1a 1 flat finish faces
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d
(PVElite equivalents 3 and 4).
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c,
1d, 2 and 6 (PVElite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin
width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
11. The following list shows the program identification numbers for the materials in this
standard:
2 4 B31.3: 5Cr-9Cr
3 5 B31.3: 12,17,27Cr
4 6 B31.3: 18Cr-8Ni
5 6 B31.3: 25Cr20Ni
6 8 B31.3: 67Ni30Cu
7 1 B31.3: 3.5Ni
8 10 B31.3: Aluminum
10 13 B31.3: Bronze
11 12 B31.3: Brass
12 9 B31.3: 70Cu-30Ni
13 6 B31.3: Ni-Fe-Cr
14 6 B31.3: Ni-Cr-Fe
19 14 TEMA: Mn-Mo
21 17 TEMA: 2-1/4Cr-1Mo
22 18 TEMA: 5Cr-1/2Mo
27 15 TEMA: TP304
28 15 TEMA: TP321
29 15 TEMA: TP347
43 29 TEMA: Copper
44 30 TEMA: Brass
46 29 TEMA: Copper-Silicon
47 31 TEMA: Admiralty
48 37 TEMA: Zirconium
49 15 TEMA: Cr-Ni-Fe-Mo-Cu-Cb
Example Problems
Example problem 1 is a comparison problem for a fixed tubesheet exchanger that has a
thick walled metal bellows expansion joint. The results compare very well to the other
exchanger program. There are several additional example problems contained in the files
TEXAMPLE.
Note:
Fvt, Fvs - User-defined Shell-side and Tube-side vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, Pt - Shell-side and Tube-side Design Pressures.
Th - With or Without Thermal Expansion.
Ca - With or Without Corrosion Allowance.
&KDSWHU
The WRC 107/FEA Module
Introduction
This chapter discusses the WRC 107/FEA Module in PVElite. To begin, make sure that
the current analysis type is WRC 107/FEA. This can be determined when viewing the
main menu. From version 4.0 of PVElite, an interface for performing finite element analy-
sis (FEA) of nozzle-shell junctions, is available. You can choose to perform either WRC
107 or FEA.
WRC 107 is a method for determining stresses on the shell of a vessel when a nozzle or
some rectangular attachment is being loaded. A typical case is to analyze the vessel
stresses on a nozzle due to external piping loads. These loads are obtained from a piping
flexibility analysis. This type of stress analysis is based on “Local Stresses in Spherical
and Cylindrical Shells due to External Loadings,” Welding Research Council Bulletin
107, August 1965, and revision 1979, based on the prior work of P.P. Bijlaard.
As of Version 3.3, PVElite features a stress summation capability. The program computes
overall stress intensities on a vessel/nozzle intersection in accordance with ASME Section
VIII Division 2. Local vessel stress calculations for sustained, expansion, and occasional
loads along with pressure stresses are transformed into code-defined stress components.
The output, in the form of Pm, Pl, and Q and their appropriate combinations, can be com-
pared with Section VIII Div. 2 allowable values.
There are times when the applicability of the WRC bulletin 107 is in question or a particu-
lar design is out of the scope of the bulletin. Examples include large nozzles, hillside noz-
zles, and lateral nozzles. In these cases and others, FEA is the best way to get accurate
results. The FEA interface in PVElite uses an encapsulated finite element program (Noz-
zlePro) available from Paulin Research Group (www.paulin.com). To run the FEA, the
user should purchase the NozzlePro program and install it in the Nozpro subfolder under
the PVElite folder. PVElite will automatically run it and present the results in the PVElite
screen.
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
The attachment number should start out at 1 and continue by ones for each successive
attachment to be analyzed. These whole integer numbers will be reflected in the input
echo generated by the program. This number can be between up to 5 digits in length.
Merge
Use this option to bring in data from the "Shells and Heads" module. Just select the shell
you want to model this nozzle with, and all the appropriate data will be brought in from
that shell.
If the vessel on which you are analyzing has dimensions specified based on the inside
diameter, choose ID. If the diameter basis is outside, choose OD. These are the only
acceptable inputs for this cell.
Diameter of Vessel
Enter the diameter of the vessel in the units displayed. The diameter basis for the vessel is
a user defined value and appears above With the vessel wall thickness, diameter basis and
corrosion allowance known, PVElite will automatically determine the mean radius.
Enter the thickness of the vessel wall in this field. If, the vessel in question is pipe and a
12.5% mill tolerance is wished to be used then enter the actual thickness of the vessel wall
times 0.875. PVElite does not make any modification to this value unless a corrosion
allowance is specified.
If a corrosion allowance is to be used then enter it in this field. The vessel wall thickness
will be decreased by this amount and the mean radius will be adjusted accordingly.
Material Name
Click the "Material Database" button to look up a material name from the material data-
base. Click the "Material Edit Properties" button to change the properties of the selected
material. Users can also choose between the ASME Section VII Div 1 or Div 2 material
database.
If you enter the name on this input cell, it will retrieve the first material it finds with a
matching name.
EXAMPLES FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION: SA-516 70, SA-285 C
S. No Material
1 Low Carbon Steels, UTS < 130 ksi
Check this field if you would like to input the forces and moments in the traditional
WRC107 convention. Leave this field unchecked if you would like to input loads in Glo-
bal Coordinates and perform the stress summation. The program will NOT perform the
Div. 2 stress summation and S.I. check if this field is checked. This option is only avail-
able when running a WRC 107 calculation.
Check this field if you would like to input loads in Global Coordinates and input cold/hot
Div. II allowable stresses. The program will perform Stress Summation and check against
S.I. allowables if Sustained (unrelenting) loadings are known. If you are performing FEA,
the program will ask for additional information.
Check this field if you would like to input Sustained loads in Global Coordinates. The
Stress summation will be performed and the stress intensities will be checked based on the
different load cases.
Note For graphics plot of EXPansion loads—temporarily set sustained and occasional
to not checked.
Check this field if you would like to input Occasional loads in Global Coordinates. For
WRC 107, the Stress summation will be performed and the stress intensities will be
checked based on loading cases.
Note For graphics plot of Occasional loads—temporarily set sustained and expansion to
not checked.
If the junction that is being analyzed is a nozzle, enter the diameter basis here. Select the
nozzle’s diameter basis from the pull-down menu.
Enter the nozzle wall thickness. The WRC 107 program will use this thickness when the
hollow attachment is used. If the standard 12.5% mill tolerance is to be deducted, simply
multiply the standard wall thickness by 0.875 directly on the spreadsheet.
Nozzle Diameter
Enter the nozzle diameter. Both the nozzle diameter and thickness must be specified. The
nozzle diameter should be entered in accordance with the nozzle diameter basis. The units
are displayed above.
Material Name
This input is only needed for FEA. Press on the "Material Database" button to look up a
material name from the material database. Press the "Material Edit Properties" button to
change the properties of the selected material.
If you type in the name on this input cell, it will retrieve the first material it finds with a
matching name.
EXAMPLES FOR MATERIAL SPECIFICATION: SA-516 70, SA-285 C
Some typical material names (standard ASME material name):
• Plates & Bolting
• SA-516 55
• SA-516 60
• SA-516 65
• SA-516 70
• SA-193 B7
• SA-182-F1
• SA-182 F1
• SA-182 F11
• SA-182 F12
• SA-182 F22
• SA-105
• SA-36
• SA-106 B
• Stainless Steels
• SA-240 304
• SA-240 304L
• SA-240 316
• SA-240 316L
• SA-193 B8
• Aluminum
• SB-209
• SB-234
• Titanium
• SB-265 1
• Nickel
• SB-409
• SB-424
Reinforcement
Select the type of reinforcement (if present) from the list. Selecting a reinforcement type
causes a popup window to appear for prompts concerning reinforcing pad or hub
dimensions.
In a finite element analysis attachments can have a reinforcement pad or hub type self-
reinforcement. Results are available for the some critical locations such as the nozzle-shell
junction and the edge of the pad.
While in WRC 107 analysis (due to the limitations of the bulletin) only reinforcement pad
can be considered. When the reinforcing pad dimensions are included the program per-
forms two analyses for this situation. The first analysis uses the nozzle OD and the vessel
wall thickness plus the reinforcing pad thickness. The second run takes the pad into
account by making the nozzle OD equal to the reinforcing pad diameter and assuming a
solid attachment.
Attachments other than nozzles can be analyzed using the WRC107 method. The dimen-
sion C11 is the FULL length of the attachment in the circumferential direction. Most often
these types of attachments are lifting lugs or vessel support lugs.
The parameter C22 is the FULL length of the attachment in the longitudinal direction.
Pad Diameter
Enter the diameter of the reinforcing pad along the surface of the vessel. This information
will be used to calculate the stresses at the edge of the reinforcing pad using a solid attach-
ment model. Reinforcement pad is explicitly modeled in the finite element analysis.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of the reinforcing pad. If external corrosion is to be considered, enter
the corroded pad thickness. In WRC 107, when a pad is used the combined vessel+pad
thickness is used for the stress computation at the edge of the nozzle. The corroded vessel
thickness is used for the stress computation at the edge of the pad. Reinforcement pad is
explicitly modeled in the finite element analysis.
With square/rectangle attachment, enter the FULL length of the PAD in the circumferen-
tial direction. The definition of C1 in wrc107 is the half length of the attachment in the cir-
cumferential direction. The change was done for user convenience.
With square/rectangle attachment, enter the FULL length of the PAD in the longitudinal
direction. The definition of C1 in wrc107 is the half length of the attachment in the longi-
tudinal direction. The change was done for user convenience.
Weld Leg Size for Fillet between Nozzle and Shell / Pad
It is an optional field. Enter the fillet leg size.
S. No Material
1 Low Carbon Steels, UTS < 130 ksi
Is there a knuckle ?
Check here if this cone has a knuckle.
Enter the design pressure of the vessel in this field using the units above. The pressure
stress equation is of the following form:
Longitudinal Stress = Pressure * ri^2 / ( ro^2 - ri^2 )
Hoop Stress = 2.0 * Longitudinal Stress.
For the spherical case the membrane stress due to internal pressure uses the Lame type
equation to compute the stress at both the upper and lower surfaces of the vessel at the
edge of the attachment.
Radial Load
Enter the value for the load which is trying to push or pull the nozzle in/out of the vessel.
Positive loads try to “push” the nozzle while negative loads try to “pull” the nozzle. The
program does not account for the effect of pressure thrust. However, if you input in global
coordinates (stress summation), the program will consider pressure thrust as default unless
you specify NOT to.
Enter the circumferential shear load VC from B to A in the units above. If the vessel is
spherical then enter the shear load V2 from D to C. The sign convention should be in
accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Enter the longitudinal shear load VL from D to C in the units above. If the vessel is spher-
ical then enter the shear load V1 from B to A. The sign convention should be in accor-
dance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Circumferential Moment
Enter the circumferential moment MC or M1 in the units displayed above. The sign con-
vention should be in accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Longitudinal Moment
Enter the longitudinal moment ML or M2 in the units displayed above. The sign conven-
tion should be in accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Torsional Moment
Enter the torsional moment in the units displayed above. The sign convention should be in
accordance with the WRC107 bulletin.
Often times a vessel designer would like to determine the maximum force or moment on
an attachment while keeping the other 5 constant. By checking to one of these fields
PVElite will iterate and determine the maximum force or moment to produce a desired
stress intensity. If your geometry includes a reinforcing pad, PVElite will perform the
same type analysis at the edge of the reinforcing pad. The above loads produce the highest
local bending loads and will usually govern the design. This is why the shear loads and
torsional moment are not options.
This entry should be a stress value approximately 3 times the hot allowable stress for the
vessel material as taken from Section II Part D of the ASME Code. PVElite will use this
number to compare computed stress intensities if one of the “Compute Maximum” fields
was checked. Note that in the results PVElite performs the analysis using the input values.
After that has been completed, PVElite will then iterate for the maximum force or
moment as it has been instructed to.
Note The sign of the vessel centerline direction vector can be +ve or -ve follows
the location of data point (A->D) convention defined by WRC 107, e.g. for
a vertical vessel, if point A is at the bottom of the nozzle, then the Y direc-
tion cosine of the vessel will be -1.0. Remember points A and B are always
lie along the direction of the vessel. The nozzle direction vector is defined
as a vector pointing from the nozzle connection to the centerline of the ves-
sel.Cold Stress Intensity Allowable (Smc)
For FEA, enter the loads according to each category shown on the screen, where
Enter the system design pressure. It shall always be a positive (or 0) entry. The pressure
thrust force P*A will be added to the value of the nozzle radial load UNLESS the user
deactivates and disables the following field. This value is used only if the user is perform-
ing WRC 107 analysis.
Check this box if you wish to include the pressure thrust force as part of the radial load.
This value is used only if the user is performing WRC 107 analysis.
Enter the DIFFERENCE between the peak pressure of the system and the system design
pressure. It shall always be a positive (or 0) entry. The additional thrust load due to this
pressure difference will also be accounted for in the nozzle radial loading UNLESS a
response of N to “Include Pressure Thrust” was entered above.
This entry will be superimposed onto the system design pressure to evaluate the primary
membrane stress due to occasional loads. This value is used only if the user is performing
WRC 107 analysis.
WRC107 Version
There are 3 options available here. The first option is for the original August 1965 version
of this industry standard. The second option is for March 1979 and option 3 is for March
1979 use B1 and B2. In 1979 the Welding Research Council noted that if certain curves
were flipped, the computed stress results matched theoretical results more closely. In that
same year an adjustment was made to allow this stress computation method to compute a
maximum stress that did not lie on the stress points A, B, C or D. This is referred to as
computation of the off-angle maximums. Thus, we can infer the third option is probably
the most accurate.
In many instances, the geometric parameter Beta which is computed for cylindrical shell
geometry’s, exceeds the parameter Gamma for certain WRC107 curves. When this occurs
PVElite will pause and display a message “Beta too Big” or “Beta too Small”. If the
response to Use Interactive Control is “No” then PVElite will use the last point on the
curve that is available. If the response to Interactive Control is “Yes” PVElite will pause
and ask you to enter what you believe the value of the stress parameter should be. This
will involve having the WRC107 bulletin with all of the curves available.
Check this field to include the WRC107 Stress Concentrations (Kn & Kb). The program
will estimate and use the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb per Appendix B of the
WRC-107 Bulletin.
For normal analysis, do not check this field. And DO NOT include the next field “Pressure
Stress Indices Per Div. 2”.
Be very careful when using Y for this input and the next input. You may check ASME
VIII Div.2 AD-160 to see if you need to consider fatigue effect. Please note that the pro-
gram currently DOES NOT perform the fatigue analysis per Div.2 Appendix 4 & 5 rules.
The program simply multiply the stresses by the factors and/or indices. The user can com-
pare the fatigue effect. Therefore the stress summation results with these factors are
intended for your references ONLY. Please review the User’s Guide for detail.
Enter the fillet radius between the nozzle and the vessel shell. The program will use this
value to calculate the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb per Appendix B of the WRC-
107 Bulletin.
If you have a re-pad, the same Kn and Kb will be used for the vessel and pad intersection.
Check this field to include the stress indices described in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 2, prima-
rily to account for the fatigue analysis of the vessel nozzle under internal pressure. The
stress indices can be found in the Table AD-560.7 of the Code.
Check this box to compute pressure, stresses in the shell and nozzle per WRC-386. WRC-
386 provides a method for calculating the stresses in cylinder to cylinder intersections
(such as cylinder to nozzle junction), due to the internal pressure and radial thrust load-
ings.
Note Using WRC -368 along with WRC 107/297 is not accurate when calculating the
combined stress from pressure and external loads. So, WRC-368 is only active
when no external loads are specified and the attachment type is round.
For more information on WRC-368 pressure thrust please read "Modeling of Internal
Pressure and Thrust Loads on Nozzles Using WRC-368. You can access this information
in the July 2001 edition of the COADE Mechanical Engineering News (pgs. 9-13) or via
our Website www.coade.com/newsletters/jul01.pdf.
Discussion of Results
WRC107 Stress Calculations
The program computes stress intensities in accordance with WRC107 and includes the
effects of longitudinal and hoop stresses due to internal pressure. If the geometry includes
a circular reinforcing pad, PVElite will perform two analyses on the geometry. The first
analysis will compute the stresses at the edge of the nozzle. The second stress analysis will
be at the edge of the reinforcing pad.
PVElite uses the Lamé equation to determine the exact hoop stress at the upper and lower
surface of the cylinder around the edge of the attachment. The hoop stress equations, as
well as the longitudinal stress equation are as follows:
2
Pri
S Long 2 2
r0 ri
S Hoop (Upper) = 2 S
Long
S Hoop (Lower)
2
P ri r0
2
2 2
r0 ri
P § r0 2ri ·
3 3
S Long ¨¨ 3 3 ¸¸
2 © r0 ri ¹
S Hoop S Long
For each run performed a table of dimensionless stress factors for each loading will be dis-
played for review. Any table figure followed by an exclamation point (!) means that the
curve figure for that loading has been exceeded.
Why are the stresses at Edge of the Pad the same as at the Edge of the Nozzle?
Since the stress is a direct product of the stress factor, the stresses computed at the edge of
the pad may be same as those at the edge of the nozzle if the curve parameter for that type
of stress has been exceeded.
What are the Allowable Stresses ?
The stress intensities computed should typically be between 1.5 and 3.0 times the hot
allowable stress for the vessel material at operating temperature. If the results are less than
1.5 Sa then the configuration and loading are acceptable. If the load is self-relieving, that
is if it would relax or disappear after only a small rotation or translation of the attachment,
the allowable stress intensity would increase to 3.0 Sa.
Since many geometry do not fall within the acceptable range of what WRC107 will
accept, it may be necessary to use a more sophisticated tool to solve the problems where
the diameter of the vessel is very large in comparison with the nozzle or where the thick-
ness of the vessel or nozzle is small. An example of a more sophisticated tool would be a
FEA (finite element analysis) program.
M TAXIS M
T
V (or V ) V L
1 C
B Upper
A VC A B
V (or V ) L C C Lower
2
M LAXIS M CAXIS
M 1AXIS P AXIS
(or M ) C
P AXIS
M 2AXIS M CAXIS
(or M ) L D
D M AXIS
1 A
B
A B
C
M L AXIS
M2 AXIS
C
Pm < kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb< 1.5kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q < 3Smavg
Where Pm, Pl, Pb, and Q are the general primary membrane stress, the local primary mem-
brane stress, the local primary bending stress, and the total secondary stresses (membrane
plus bending), respectively; and K, Smh, and Smavg are the occasional stress factor, the hot
material allowable stress intensity, and the average material stress intensity (Smh + Smc) /
2.
Due to the stress classification defined by Section VIII, Division 2 in the vicinity of noz-
zles, as given in the Table 4-120.1, the bending stress terms caused by any external load
moments or internal pressure in the vessel wall near a nozzle or other opening, should be
classified as Q, or the secondary stresses, regardless of whether they were caused by sus-
tained or expansion loads. This causes Pb to disappear, and leads to a much more detailed
classification:
Each of the stress terms defined in the above classifications contain three parts: two stress
components in normal directions and one shear stress component. To combine these
stresses, the following rules apply:
1. Compute the normal and shear components for each of the three stress types, i.e. Pm,
Pl, and Q.
2. Compute the stress intensity due to the Pm and compare it against kSmh.
3. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pmand Pl; compute the
resultant stress intensity and compare its value against 1.5kSmh.
4. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to Pm, Pl, and Q, compute
the resultant stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3Smavg.
5. If there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types may be repeated
using a k value of 1.2.
These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section
VIII, Division 2 and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, Pb, is
not applicable to the shell stress evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section
VIII, Division 2 requirements. Under the same analogy, the peak stress limit may also be
written as:
Pl + P b + Q + F < S a
The above equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is
met based on the statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below:
“If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis
for cyclic operation is required and it may be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed
in 4-135 has been satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials,
design, fabrication, testing and inspection of this division.”
The equations used in PVElite to qualify the various stress components can be summa-
rized as follows:
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) + Q(SUS + EXP + OCC) < 1.5(Smc + Smh)
If some of the conditions of in ASME VIII Div.2, AD-160 are not satisfied, you probably
need to perform the formal fatigue analysis. Peak stresses are required to be calculated or
estimated. You may consider using AD-560 “Alternative Rules for Nozzle Design”
instead of Article 4-6 “Stresses in Openings for Fatigue Evaluation” to calculate the peak
pressure stress for the opening. If all conditions of AD-560.1 through AD-560.6 are satis-
fied, the stress indices given in Table AD-560.7 may be used. If user says “Yes”, the pro-
gram will use these pressure stress indices to modify the primary stress due to internal
pressure (hoop and longitudinal stresses). For external loads, the highest peak stress are
usually localized in fillets and transitions. If the user decides to use WRC107 stress con-
centration factors (Kn, Kb), the fillet radius between the Vessel and Nozzle is required. (If
a reinforcing pad is used, the program assumes the same pad fillet radius.) The program
will make a crude approximation and use WRC107 Appendix-B equations (3) and (4) to
estimate Kn and Kb. The tension and bending stresses are thus modified using Kn and Kb
respectively. The program outputs the local stresses for 4 pairs of points (upper and lower)
at the intersection. The user should not direct the program to perform the stress summa-
tions. Instead the user should determine which stresses should be added based on locations
in order to obtain the peak stress level, then use Appendix-4 & 5 rules and fatigue curves
depending on operation cycles. Based on comparisons with finite element analysis, it is
known that the top tip of the fillet weld on the nozzle usually experiences the highest peak
stress due to external loads. So it is conservative to add all the peak stresses after including
both pressure stress indices and concentration factors. Note that the stress summation may
ONLY be used to check stress intensities, not stress levels. You need the peak stress level
to perform fatigue analysis. The current stress summation routine does not compare stress
level with fatigue allowables per Appendix-5. However, you may find the stress summa-
tion results useful to compare the combined effect due to the stress concentration factor
and pressure stress indices.
111%
2. Next report is the Highest Primary Stress Report that outlines the stresses at critical
location like the nozzle-shell junction and the edge of the pad.
3. Highest Secondary and fatigue Stress Reports are provided.
4. Next, the program lists Nozzle Stress Intensification factors for use in a beam type
pipe stress analysis program such as CAESAR II.
5. The NozzlePro program computes the maximum individual allowable loads and
simultaneously acting allowable loads. Both Primary and Secondary loads are
reported. A typical report is listed here,
Allowable Loads
SECONDARY Maximum Conservative Realistic
Load Type (Range): Individual Simultaneous Simultaneous
Occurring Occurring Occurring
Axial Force (lb. ) 398030. 120631. 180946.
Inplane Moment (in. lb.) 5306513. 1137199. 2412363.
Outplane Moment (in. lb.) 3358105. 719650. 1526608.
Torsional Moment (in. lb.) 2343568. 710264. 1065396.
Pressure (psi ) 344. 111. 111.
The conservative simultaneous loads will produce stresses that are approximately 60-to-
70% of the allowable. The Realistic Allowable Simultaneous loads are the maximum
loads that can be applied simultaneously, they produce stresses that are closer to 100% of
the allowable. The Maximum Individual Occurring Primary Pressure can be taken as a
finite element calculation of the MAWP for the nozzle.
6. Nozzle-Shell junction flexibilities are also available. These flexibilities can be used to
accurately model the flexibility of the junction and can be included in the pipe stress
program that is used to model the piping system attaching to the nozzle.
Thus, users will have a choice of performing either an WRC 107 or a finite element analy-
sis from within the same module, without redundant input. As with any finite element
program users should visually check the finite element mesh for errors and make sure the
FEA results make sense for stress analysis perspective.
Technical queries regarding FEA results should be addressed to Paulin Research Group
(www.paulin.com).
Examples
The example problem listed below is a comparison problem in our QA series. It can be
found in the file CHECKS.
The following example problem goes through a comprehensive local stress analysis of a
vessel/nozzle using WRC107 and ASME Section VIII, Division 2 criteria.
After confirming that the geometry guidelines per WRC 107 are met, the actual prepara-
tion of the WRC 107 calculation input can now begin. One of the most important steps in
the WRC 107 procedure is to identify the correlation between the stress output global
coordinates and the WRC 107 local axes. The PVElite program performs this conversion
automatically. The user will, however, have to identify the vectors defining the vessel as
well as the nozzle centerline. The following figure is provided to illustrate the definition of
the direction vectors of the vessel and the nozzle.
Notice that in order to define a vessel direction vector, the user first needs to designate the
output data points (A->D) as defined by the WRC 107 Bulletin. Note that the line between
data points B and A defines the vessel centerline (except for nozzles on heads, where the
vessel centerline will have to be defined along a direction which is perpendicular to that of
the nozzle). Since, in the vessel/nozzle configuration shown, point A is assigned to the
bottom of the nozzle, the vessel direction vector can be written as (0.0, -1.0, 0.0), while the
nozzle direction vector is (1.0, 0.0, 0.0). The nozzle direction vector is always defined as
the vector pointing from the vessel nozzle connection to the centerline of vessel.
For different load cases (SUS, EXP, OCC), the restraint loads (forces and moments) can be
obtained from typical piping stress analysis program like CAESAR II. These loads reflect
the action of the piping on the vessel. The following is the example loads:
MX MY MZ
Load X (lb) Y (lb) Z (lb)
(ft.lb) (ft.lb) (ft.lb)
Sustained -26 -1389 32 -65 127 4235
The total sustained axial load on the nozzle may not be reflected in the restraint report. A
pressure thrust load will contribute an additional axial load to the nozzle. The pressure
thrust force always tends to push the nozzle away from the vessel. For example, with a
pressure of 275 psi over the inside area of the 12 inch pipe, the total P load becomes:
P = -26 - P*A
= -26 - 275p (122) / 4
= -31,128
The P load may be adjusted automatically for the input by PVElite’s WRC 107 module, if
the user so requests.
FileName : WRC107 --------------------------------------- Page 1
WRC107 Analysis : CII COMPARISON ITEM: 2, 03:10pm, 05/18/98
Input Echo, WRC107 Number 2, Description: CII COMPARISON
Tot. Circ. Str. 33179 -13429 48325 -18035 54563 -34451 55329 -35117
------------------------------------------------------------------
Long. Memb. P 10081 10081 10081 10081 12510 12510 12510 12510
Long. Bend. P 46473 -46473 46473 -46473 28748 -28748 28748 -28748
Long. Memb. MC 0 0 0 0 -41 -41 41 41
Long. Bend. MC 0 0 0 0 -190 190 190 -190
Long. Memb. ML -857 -857 857 857 0 0 0 0
Long. Bend. ML -7325 7325 7325 -7325 0 0 0 0
Tot. Long. Str. 48372 -29924 64736 -42860 41027 -16089 41489 -16387
-------------------------------------------------------------------
Shear VC | 2 2 -2 -2 0 0 0 0
Shear VL | 0 0 0 0 -110 -110 110 110
Shear MT | 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
|
Tot. Shear| 6 6 2 2 -106 -106 114 114
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Str. Int. | 48372 29924 64736 42860 54563 34451 55329 35117
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Tot. Circ. Str.| 82819 -24255-105265 32921 1225 -4625 -31489 23785
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Long. Memb. P | -2776 -2776 -2776 -2776 -3445 -3445 -3445 -3445
Long. Bend. P | -12799 12799 -12799 12799 -7917 7917 -7917 7917
Long. Memb. MC | 0 0 0 0 1758 1758 -1758 -1758
Long. Bend. MC | 0 0 0 0 8120 -8120 -8120 8120
Long. Memb. ML | 10647 10647 -10647 -10647 0 0 0 0
Long. Bend. ML | 90951 -90951 -90951 90951 0 0 0 0
|
Tot. Long. Str.| 86023 -70281-117173 90327 -1484 -1890 -21240 10834
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Shear VC | -468 -468 468 468 0 0 0 0
Shear VL | 0 0 0 0 1894 1894 -1894 -1894
Shear MT | -2380 -2380 -2380 -2380 -2380 -2380 -2380 -2380
|
Tot. Shear| -2848 -2848 -1912 -1912 -486 -486 -4274 -4274
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Str. Int. | 87688 70456 117472 90390 2878 4708 33037 25068
--------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Type of | Max. S.I. S.I. Allowable | Result
Stress Int. | (psi ) |
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Pm (SUS) | 26263 20000 | Failed
Pm+Pl (SUS) | 41408 30000 | Failed
Pm+Pl+Q (TOTAL)| 148608 60000 | Failed
--------------------------------------------------------------------
&KDSWHU
The Leg & Lug Module
Introduction
This chapter discusses the Leg & Lug module of the PVElite program. To use the Leg &
Lug module the current analysis type should be Leg & Lug. The current analysis type
appears on the main menu of PVElite. The basic capabilities of the Leg & Lug module are
to analyze structural members (legs), support lugs and lifting lugs. The basic required
information for each of these analysis types is shown below.
• Vessel design internal pressure
• Design temperature for the attachment
• Vessel outside diameter
• Weight of vessel operating and dry
• Vessel dimensions
• Additional horizontal force on vessel
• Location of horizontal force above grade
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
The design temperature for the attachment is used to compute the material properties for
attachment being analyzed. In most cases the actual attachment temperature will be differ-
ent from the vessel design temperature. The controlling stress for support lug and vessel
leg calculations is the yield stress. The material yield stress can be looked up in the tables
in ASME Section II Part D.
The weight of the vessel should be the weight of the vessel while it is operating. This
should include operating fluid, trays, insulation etc. Support lug calculations should use
the same loading conditions. However since vessels are typically lifted “dry” the empty
weight of the vessel should be used when performing lifting lug calculations. There is a
separate field for lifting weight of the vessel.
Item Number
Enter the a positive integer value (i.e. 1) in this cell. This number will not be used in the
analysis but will be displayed on the screen while PVElite is executing.
Vessel Description
Enter a meaningful descriptor for this analysis. This will be displayed on the screen and in
the output reports. An example might be Cryogen - 1. A combination of letters and num-
bers up to 15 may be used.
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure that the vessel will be operating at. This value will not be used
by the program, however, the pressure will be an input item for WRC 107. This is also a
good number to have for information purposes.
Shell Thickness
Enter the shell thickness. This input is used only in the case of a support lug with a full
reinforcement ring. Shell thickness is required to compute the Area and Moment of Iner-
tia of the shell-ring junction.
Shell Material
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the Material Data-
base. Click the Material Edit Properties button to change the properties of the selected
material. If you cannot find the material you need in the Material Database, you can add
its specification and properties by selecting Tools, Edit/Add Materials.
Type of Analysis
Use the table below to determine the appropriate analysis type:
Vessel Leg If the vessel rests on vessel legs select this option. The program
prompts you to enter all information necessary to perform an
AISC Unity Check on the vessel legs. This option also allows
you to design the leg, baseplate and anchor bolts.
Lifting Lug If the vessel is lifted by lug type attachments select this option.
The program prompts you to enter information pertaining to the
lifting lugs.
Trunnion If the vessel is lifted by a trunnion select this option. The pro-
gram prompts you to enter information pertaining to the trunnion
design.
Note: You can also perform a local stress analysis on the trun-
nion per WRC 107 methods.
Analyze Baseplate
Check this box for designing the baseplate and Anchor Bolts per Moss and Bednar.
Additional Area
The user may wish to consider the additional area exposed to the wind from piping, plat-
forms, insulation etc. PVElite will automatically compute an effective diameter with the
input diameter known.
Importance Factor ( I )
Enter the value for the importance factor here. The importance factor accounts for the
degree of hazard to life and property. If the vessel is 100 miles ( 160 kilometers ) from the
hurricane oceanline enter a 1.00. If the vessel is at the hurricane oceanline enter 1.05. Val-
ues up to 1.11 are acceptable here. Refer to ASCE #7 and ANSI 58.1 for more information
on the importance factor (Table 1 and Table 5 in ANSI A58.1). For ASCE 7-95, refer to
Table 6-2).
Wind Exposure
Enter an integer here for the ASCE 7 wind exposure factor.
Exposure (A) - “Large city centers with at least 50% of the buildings hav-
ing a height in excess of 70 ft.”
Exposure (B) - “Urban and suburban areas, wooded areas, or other ter-
rain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having
the size of single family dwellings.”
Type of Hill
Select the type of hill. See ASCE 7-95 Fig. 6-2 for details.
• None
• 2-D Ridge
• 2-D Escarpment
• 3-D Axisym Hill
Seismic Zone
Enter the seismic zone in which your vessel is operating. The seismic zones are pictured in
ASCE #7. A value of 0 will slightly increase the reaction force. A zone entry of 4 will pro-
duce the highest loads.
Number of Legs
Enter the number of legs attached to the vessel. This number must be greater than or equal
to 3 and less than 16. PVElite will determine the effective number of legs for bending and
shear of the vessel.
Length of Legs
Enter the distance from the bottom leg support point to the attachment point on the vessel.
This length term is used in determining the legs resistance to bending. Long legs are more
likely to buckle than shorter legs. The distance of the tangent line of the vessel above
grade should always be equal to the length of the legs. If they are not the same PVElite
will use the maximum of the two when determining the wind pressure and the location of
the centroid.
Leg Results
When a leg analysis is performed PVElite reads all of the data out of the structural data-
base (AISC89.BIN). The resulting leg loads are compared to the allowable leg compres-
sion loads as outlined in AISC paragraph 1.5.1.3. Either the Kl/r > Cc or Kl/r < Cc formula
will be shown as appropriate. The combination of stresses due to bending and compres-
sion will be compared to the allowable per AISC 1.6.1. This is generally termed the AISC
unity check. If the result is greater than 1.0 the member has failed.
Note If there is no top bar/ring, enter the top width of the gusset.
Lift Orientation
Enter the vessel lift orientation for the lifting lug analysis. For more information see Fig-
ure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Axial Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion along the axis of the vessel. For more infor-
mation see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Normal Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion perpendicular to the wall of the vessel. For
more information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Tangential Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion tangent to the wall of the vessel. For more
information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
FLAT LIFTING
LUG OFFSET
ARC
RADIUS
HOLE
PERPENDICULAR DIAMETER
LUG
SIDE FILLET
WELD
BOTTOM
FILLET WELD
LEGS SUPPORT
LUG
CROSS BRACING
LEG ORIENTATION:
WEAK
GUSSET GUSSET
WIDTH THICKNESS
STRONG
WIDTH LENGTH
THICKNESS
Output
PVElite produces three basic types of results in the Leg & Lug module. Results for Legs,
using the methods described by AISC, results for Lifting Lugs, using basic engineering
principles, and results for Support Lugs, using AISC methods and formulae from pressure
vessel text books and other engineering reference texts.
The input for this module include some basic vessel parameters such as the vessel tangent-
tangent length, the diameter and the height of the bottom tangent above grade. If you are
performing a Leg or Support Lug calculation, the program follows these basic steps in
order to determine the loads.
For evaluation of wind loads:
1. Determine the elevation of the top and bottom seam of the vessel.
2. Determine the wind pressure at both elevations, and take the average.
3. Determine the effective diameter of the vessel and its area.
4. Compute the centroid of the vessel.
5. Resolve the wind pressure and the area at the centroid.
For evaluation of seismic loads:
1. Determine the seismic zone factor from UBC table 23-I or use the one the user gave.
2. Multiply this value times the operating weight of the vessel.
3. Apply this load at the centroid of the vessel.
If both types of loadings are considered, PVElite will compute both and then choose the
maximum of the two.
Examples
The first example presented below involves the horizontal lifting of a vessel that weighs
about 73,000 pounds. The design specification stated that if one lug failed, the other lug
must be capable of supporting the entire weight of the vessel. In addition, the spreader bar
used to pick up the tower was a few inches short and caused a normal load to be generated
on the flat lifting lugs. The normal force is simply a function of the angle the chains make
with the lug and the load per lug.
Ideally this geometry should be analyzed a second time with the lifting weight of the ves-
sel in the erection weight input field. Also the tangent force should be set equal to 0. This
would simulate picking the vessel up in its normal operating position or when it is being
installed in the field.
As you can see the arrangement worked well with the exception of the bending stress in
the lug. This is essentially cantilever bending. The remedy for this situation is to place a
gusset support between the top head and the flat lug. This would decrease the moment arm
and thus lower the bending stress.
The next example problem is for a lug supported vessel. This particular arrangement had
three support lugs. This vessel is supported in a structure containing piping and other
equipment. Bending stress are computed in the bottom support lug plate by two methods.
One is a uniform load (as if the lug were sitting on a beam) and the other is a point load.
Obviously, the point load on the plate will produce much higher bending stresses. When
you are looking at these bending stress results for the bottom plate only one will be appli-
cable. The stress in the gusset plate and its allowable are also computed. The allowable
should be greater than the actual stress for the lug to work properly. The results for the
gusset plates are computed using rules of the AISC.
The final example here is a leg supported vessel. The main point of interest is the AISC
Unity Check. The unity check combines forces and moments on the leg and essentially
predicts buckling. This result must be less than or equal to 1.0. If your unity check is
small, then you should be able to decrease the size of the structural member until you have
a unity check that is satisfactory for your design work.
Fr = 6742.53 lb./in.
Shear Stress in Lug above Hole vs. Allowable Base Metal Shear :
Shs = SQRT( W^2 + N^2 + T^2 ) / Sha
Shs = SQRT( 0^2 + 17045^2 + 72525^2 ) / 30.188
Shs = 2467.94 psi
COMPUTED PARAMETERS:
Effective Wind Area of Vessel AREA 47001.60 sq.in.
Wind Pressure on Vessel ( ASCE #7 or User ) PWIND 35.57 psf
Location of Centroid above Base Point WH 55.00 ft.
Spl = ( Flug/2*Dgp/2)/((Wpl/6)*Tpl^2)
Spl = ( 35958/2* 14.000/2)/(( 12.00/6)* 2.0000^2)
Spl = 15732.03 psi
Bending Stress in bottom Support Plate (Unif. Load) Per Bednar p.156:
Spl2 = Beta1 * Flug/(Lpl*Wfb)) * Wfb^2 / Tpl^2 per Roark & Young 5th ed
Spl2 = 2.105 * ( 35958.9 / 60.000) * 4.000^2 / 2.000^2
Spl2 = 5046.24 psi
COMPUTED PARAMETERS:
Effective Wind Area of Vessel AREA 20736.00 sq.in.
Wind Pressure on Vessel ( ASCE #7 or User ) PWIND 27.43 psf
Location of Centroid above Base Point WH 30.00 ft.
Sb = ( 0.6 * Fy * Occfac )
Sb = ( 0.6 * 38000 * 1.33 )
Sb = 30324.00 psi
Baseplate Input
The Baseplate Thickness calculation is included in the vessel leg analysis for I-beam, pipe,
and angle leg only, and can be activated by clicking the Annoyance Baseplate checkbox.
The design is based on the method for I-beam leg described in the Pressure Design Manual
by D. Moss and is applied to the other leg shapes. CodeCalc will assume the following for
all Baseplate Thickness calculations:
• Strong axis leg orientation
• Bolts are installed along the length sides only (B dimension). For more information
see Figure 18C - Baseplate Dimension
• The leg is attached symmetrically on the baseplate. For more information see Figure
18C - Baseplate Dimension
It is advisable to check the baseplate dimensions using the graphic feature of CodeCalc.
Baseplate Length B
Enter the length "B" of the baseplate. For more information see Figure 18C - Baseplate
Dimension.
Baseplate Width D
Enter the width "D" of the baseplate. For more information see Figure 18C - Baseplate
Dimension.
Baseplate Material
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the database. If a
material is not a contained in the database its specification and properties can be entered
manually by selecting Tools, Edits/Add Materials from the Main Menu.
Bolt Material
Click the Material Database button to look up a material name from the database. If a
material is not a contained in the database its specification and properties can be entered
manually by selecting Tools, Edits/Add Materials from the Main Menu.
Distance from the Edge of the Leg to the Bolt Hole, "z"
Enter the "z" dimension of the baseplate. For more information see Figure 18C- Baseplate
Dimension.
Thread Series
There are three options for this entry:
• TEMA Bolt Table
• UNC Bolt Table
• User specified root area of a single bolt.
Water Content (gal) per 94 lb. Sack of f’c 28 day Ultimate Compressive
Cement Strength (psi)
7.50 2000
6.75 2500
6.0 3000
5.00 3750
Baseplate Results
The Baseplate analysis produces the following result:
• The thickness requirement is calculated using the 1.5 allowable plate bending stress
and compared to the input thickness.
• The concrete bearing pressure is compared to the input allowable stress
• The anchor bolt size is analyzed at the bending level (D. Moss) and the overall vessel
moment equilibrium (H. Bednar). In the absence of tension in the bolts you should
choose a practical bolt size.
Trunnion Input
A hollow or solid circular trunnion with or without pad reinforcement can be analyzed
using the Trunnion Design module. The main considerations regarding the trunnion design
are stresses at the vessel/trunnion junction and on the trunnion itself. Bending stress, shear
stress, bearing stress and the Unity Check are calculated and compared with the appropri-
ate allowables. Local stresses at the junction can be analyzed using the WRC 107 Analysis
Selection checkbox. The lifting orientation, vertical and horizontal positions, and the
orthogonal input forces are needed for WRC 107 Analysis.
CodeCalc assumes that magnitude of the applied loads is acting on one trunnion. Typi-
cally vessels are lifted with two trunnions thus the load is divided between them. An
option is to analyze the trunnion with the maximum load acting on that trunnion during the
lift. The program multiplies this lifting load by the importance factor specified by the user.
Before the analysis it is advisable to check the trunnion dimensions and the forces’ magni-
tude and direction using the graphic feature in CodeCalc.
The program does not subtract corrosion allowance (if any) and then enter the dimensions.
Trunnion Thickness
Enter the thickness of the trunnion. For more information see Figure 18D - Trunnion
Geometry.
Projection Length
Enter the projection length of the trunnion. For more information see Figure 18D - Trun-
nion Geometry.
Bail/Sling Width
Enter the bail or sling width used during erection. This input is required for locating the
the lifting load only. No analysis is performed on the bail or sling. For more information
see Figure 18D - Trunnion Geometry.
Trunnion Material
Enter the material the trunnion is made of. Depending on the size and the availability, the
trunnion can be made of pipe or sheet plate. To properly initialize the material, type its
name in this field even if the default displays. If am material is not contained in the data-
base, its specifications and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials from the Main Menu.
Reinforcement
This input is required to perform the WRC 107 Analysis.
Ring Thickness
Ring Thickness is only used to display a picture of the trunnion. This is not used in the cal-
culations. For more information see Figure 18D - Trunnion Geometry.
Lift Orientation
Enter the vessel lift orientation for the trunnion analysis. This value will be used to per-
form WRC 107 Analysis on the trunnion.
Axial Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion along the axis of the vessel. For more infor-
mation see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Normal Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion perpendicular to the wall of the vessel. For
more information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Tangential Force
Enter the component of force on the trunnion tangent to the wall of the vessel. For more
information see Figure 18E - Lifting Orientation.
Importance Factor
When the vessel is lifted from the ground it may be yanked abruptly. The Importance Fac-
tor takes this into account. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0 although values as
high as 3.0 may be used. The program multiplies the Lifting Load by the Importance Fac-
tor.
Trunnion Result
The ring outer diameter and thickness are not used in the calculations; they are used to dis-
play a picture only.
There are four passing criteria used to calculate the trunnion design bending stress, shear
stress, bearing stress and the Unity Check. The following allowables are used:
• Bending Stress: 0.66 *Sy*Occfac
• Shear Stress: 0.40 *Sy*Occfac
• Bearing Stress: 0.75 *Sy*Occfac
• WRC 107 Analysis- local stresses at 8 points are evaluated and compared with the
allowable (1.5 * S allow). For more information see the WRC 107 module.
&KDSWHU
The Pipe & Pad Module
Introduction
This chapter discusses the Pipe & Pad module in the PVElite program. To use this pro-
gram make sure the current analysis type is Pipe & Pad. This can be determined by look-
ing on the PVElite main menu. The Pipe & Pad module computes required wall thickness
and area of replacement for ANSI B31.3 intersections. These area of replacement rules are
based on the 1987 edition of ANSI B31.3 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping
Code. Extruded outlet headers are also analyzed.
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
Intersection Number
Enter an intersection number for this analysis. These should be positive integer values and
incriminated by ones.
Intersection Description
Enter a 15 letter/number identifier for this intersection. This description will not be used in
the analysis, however, it will be used in the error checker and in the output reports. This
identifier should have some link to the actual intersection. An example might be “Int
12x4”.
Design Pressure
Enter the design pressure of the ANSI B31.3 intersection. This should be the pressure that
the system will operate at continuously. Most of the internal computations for areas, wall
thickness etc. involve the design pressure.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature of the intersection. This temperature will be used to deter-
mine the allowable stress of the branch. The user may note that if a new temperature is
input the allowable stress information of the branch is updated automatically.
base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by selecting Tools, Edit/
Add Materials, from the Main Menu. An example of a valid material name is A106 B.
Valid piping materials available are
A-106 B A-285 C A-312 304 A-312 304L A-312 316 A-312 316L
A-516 55 A-516 60 A-516 65 A-516 70 A-53 A A-53 B
A-335 P1 A-335 P2 A-335 P5 A-335 P11 A-335 P22 A-537 CL1
Any material can be used as long as the hot and cold allowables are properly specified.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the estimated allowance for corrosion in this field. The difference of (wall thickness
- (corrosion allowance + mill tolerance)) must be greater than 0.
Pad Thickness
Enter the thickness of reinforcing element in this cell. All allowances for corrosion should
be taken into consideration by the user.
Output
PVElite will generate output for maximum allowable working new and cold as well as the
corroded condition. The hydrotest pressure is calculated as the maximum allowable work-
ing pressure at the design condition times 1.5 the ratio of the allowable stress at ambient
temperature to the allowable stress at the design temperature.
The replaced area can only be within a certain zone. No credit will be given for reinforce-
ment that lies outside of the zone. Please note that these zones are different for extruded
outlets.
If a reinforcing element is used PVElite will compute the required diameter for the given
thickness and the required thickness for the given diameter. If a pad is used in conjunction
with an extruded outlet header consult the piping code for details on this design. If the cal-
culated diameter falls outside the limit of reinforcement a message such as “EXCEEDS
D2” or “EXCEEDS L4” will be displayed.
The MAWP for the given geometry is an estimate because of a slight non-linearity in the
required thickness calculation. To verify the MAWP plug the value back into the analysis
as the design pressure and check to see if the area required is equal to the area available.
Example Problem
Header Branch
Dimension Basis ( Nominal or Actual ) Nominal Nominal
Nominal -or- Actual Outside Diameter 8.0000 4.0000 in.
Basic Quality Factor for Long. Joints E 1.00 1.00
Mill Tolerance c 12.5 12.5 %
Corrosion Allowance c .1000 .1000 in.
Header Branch
Allowable Stress used in Calculations 16000.00 16000.00 psi
Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature 16000.00 16000.00 psi
Actual Outside Diameter used in Calc. 8.625 4.500 in.
Nominal Thickness used in Calculations .322 .237 in.
Coefficient of Effective Stressed Dia. .400 .400
tmh = ( th + c ) / Hmtr
tmh = ( .0803 + .1000 ) / .8750
tmh = .206 in. Reqd. thickness + CA + mill tolerance
tb = ( P * Db )/2 ( Sb * QF + P * Y )
tb = ( 300 * 4.5000 )/2 ( 16000 * 1.00 + 300 * .40 )
tb = .042 in. Required thickness of branch
tmb = ( tb + c ) / Bmtr
tmb = ( .0419 + .1000 ) / .8750
tmb = .162 in. Reqd. thickness + CA + mill tolerance
Hpo = (Th*Hmtr-c)*2*Sh*He/(Dh-2*(Th*Hmtr-c)*Yh)
Hpo = ( .3220 * .875 - .100 ) * 2 * 16000 * 1.000 /
( 8.625 - 2 * ( .322 * .875 - .100 ) * .40 )
Hpo = 685.881 psig M.A.W.P., operation, header
Hpnc = (Th*Hmtr)*2*Shcold*He/(Dh-2*(Th*Hmtr)*HY)
Hpnc = ( .3220 * .875 ) * 2 * 16000 /
( 8.625 - 2 * ( .322 * .875 ) * .40 )
Hpnc = 1073.385 psig M.A.W.P., New & Cold, header
Bpo = (Tb*Bmtr-c)*2*Sb*Be/(Db-2*(Tb*Bmtr-c)*By)
Bpo = ( .2370 * .875 - .100 ) * 2 * 16000 * 1.000 /
( 4.500 - 2 * ( .237 * .875 - .100 ) * .40 )
Bpo = 778.415 psig M.A.W.P., operation, branch
Bpnc = (Tb*Bmtr)*2*Sbcold*Be/(Db-2*(Tb*Bmtr)*BY)
Bpnc = ( .2370 * .875 ) * 2 * 16000 * 1.000/
( 4.500 - 2 * ( .237 * .875 ) * .40 )
Bpnc = 1531.114 psig M.A.W.P., New & Cold, branch
d1 = ( Db-2*(Tb*Bmtr-c))/SIN( á )
d1 = ( 4.50 - 2 * ( .2370 * .88 - .1000 ))/SIN( 90.0 )
d1 = 4.285 in. Effective Length removed from pipe
A1 = ( th * d1 * ( 2 - Sin( á ) )
A1 = ( .080 * 4.285 * ( 2 - Sin( 90.0 ) )
A1 = .344 sq.in. Area required to be replaced
A3 = ( 2*L4*(Tb*Bmtr-tb-c)/Sin(á)
A3 = ( 2 * .454 * ( .237 * .8750 - .042 - .100 )/Sin( 90.0 )
A3 = .060 sq.in. Area available in branch
A5 = 2*Min(Dpad/2,d2)-(Db/2)/Sin(á))*Min(Tpad,L4)*Padf)
A5 = 2*Min( 6.00/2, 4.285 ) - ( 4.500/2) / Sin( 90.0 )) * .322 * 1.00
A5 = .483 sq.in. Area available in reinforcing pad
A6 = If(A5>0&&Dpad+2*Bw<d2*2,(.5*Min(Tpad,L4)/0.707)^2,0)
A6 = ( 0.5 * .3220 / 0.707 ) ^ 2 )
A6 = .052 sq.in. Area available in pad weld
&KDSWHU
The Base Ring Module
Introduction
The PVElite base ring module performs thickness calculations and design for annular
plate base rings, top rings, bolting, and gussets. These calculations are performed using
industry standard calculation techniques as described below.
Calculation Techniques
Thickness of a Base Ring Under Compression
The equation for the thickness of the base ring is the equation for a simple cantilever
beam. The beam is assumed to be supported at the skirt, and loaded with a uniform load
caused by the compression of the concrete due to the combined weight of the vessel and
bending moment on the down-wind / down-earthquake side of the vessel. The equation for
the cantilever thickness is found in most of the common vessel design textbooks, includ-
ing Jawad & Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of Process Equipment, page 434, for-
mula 12.12:
t = SQRT( 3 * fc * l ** 2 / s )
Where
fc = bearing stress on the concrete
l = cantilever length of base ring
s = allowable bending stress of base ring (typically 1.5 times Code allowable).
There are two commonly accepted methods of determining the bearing stress on the con-
crete. The approximate method simply calculates the compressive load on the concrete
assuming that the neutral axis for the vessel is at the centerline. Thus the load per unit area
of the concrete is, from Jawad & Farr equation 12.1, equal to
fc = -W / A - M * c / I
Where
W = Weight of vessel (worst case).
M = Bending moment on vessel (worst case).
A = Cross sectional area of base ring on foundation
c = Distance from the center of the base ring to the edge
I = Moment of inertia of the base ring on the foundation
However, when a steel skirt and base ring are supported on a concrete foundation, the
behavior of the foundation is similar to that of a reinforced concrete beam. If there is a net
bending moment on the foundation, then the force upward on the bolts must be balanced
by the force downward on the concrete. But because these two materials have different
elastic moduli, and because the strain in the concrete cross section must be equal to the
strain in the base ring at any specific location, then the neutral axis of the combined bolt/
concrete cross section will be shifted in the direction of the concrete. Several authors,
including Jawad & Farr (pages 428 to 433) and Megyesy (pages 70 to 73) have analyzed
this phenomenon. The program uses the formulation of Singh and Soler, Mechanical
Design of Heat Exchangers and Pressure Vessel Components, pages 957 to 959. This for-
mulation seems to be the most readily adaptable to computerization, as there are no tabu-
lated constants. Singh and Soler provide the following description of their method:
In this case a neutral axis parallel to the y axis exists. The location of the neutral axis is
identified by the angle alpha. The object is to determine the peak concrete pressure p and
the angle alpha.
For narrow base plate rings an approximate solution may be constructed using numerical
iteration. It is assumed that the concrete annulus under the base plate may be treated as a
thin ring of mean diameter c. Assuming the foundation to be linearly elastic, and the base
plate to be relatively rigid, Brownnell and Young have developed an approximate solution
which, can be cast in a form suitable for numerical solution. Let the total tensile stress area
of all foundation bolts be A. Within the limits of accuracy sought, it is permissible to
replace the bolts with a thin shell of thickness t and mean diameter equal to the bolt circle
diameter c, such that t = A / PI * c. We assume that the discrete tensile bolt loads, acting
around the ring, are replaced by a line load, varying in intensity with the distance from the
neutral plane.
Let n be the ratio of Young’s moduli of the bolt material to that of the concrete; n normally
varies between 10 and 15. Assuming that the concrete can take only compression (non-
adhesive surface) and that the bolts are effective only in tension (untapped holes in base
plate), an analysis [similar to that given above] yields the following results:
p = (2 * W + r2 * t * c * s) / [(t3 - t) * r1 * c]
s = (2 * (M - W * r4 * c) / (r2 * r3 * t * c ** 2)
alpha = acos [(s - n * p) / ( s + n * p )]
Where
t3 = width of base ring (similar to l in Jawad & Farr’s equations above)
c = bolt circle diameter
r1-r4 = four constants based on the neutral axis angle, and defined in Singh & Soler
equations 20.3.12 through 20.3.17, not reproduced here.
These equations give the required 7 non-linear equations to solve for 7 unknowns, namely
p, c, alpha, and the ri (i = 1, 4) parameters. The simple iteration scheme described below
converges rapidly. The iterative solution is started with assumed values of s and p; say so
and po [the program takes these from the approximate analysis it has just performed].
Then alpha is determined via the above equation. Knowing alpha the dimensionless
parameters r1, r2, r3, and r4 are computed. This enables computation of corrected values
of p and s (say po’ and so’). The next iteration is started with s1 and p1 where we choose:
s1 = .5 * (so + so’)
p1 = .5 * (po + po’)
This process is continued until the errors ei and Ei at the ith iteration stage are within spec-
ified tolerances, (ei = Ei = 0.005 is a practical value),
Where
ei = (si’ - si) / si
Ei = (pi’ - pi) / pi
Actual numerical tests show that the convergence is uniform and rapid regardless of the
starting values of so and po.
Once the new values of bolt stress and bearing pressure are calculated, the thickness of the
base ring is calculated again using the same formula given above for the approximate
method.
able bolt stress times the bolt area, and the area of the gusset is the thickness of the gusset
times one half the width of the gusset (because gussets normally taper).
Discussion of Input
Main Input Fields
1/2 0.126
5/8 0.202
3/4 0.302
7/8 0.419
1 0.551
1 1/8 0.728
1 1/4 0.929
1 3/8 1.155
1 1/2 1.405
1 5/8 1.680
1 3/4 1.980
1 7/8 2.304
2 2.652
2 1/4 3.423
2 1/2 4.292
2 3/4 5.259
3 6.324
3 1/4 7.487
3 1/2 8.749
3 3/4 10.108
4 11.566
This information was adapted from Jawad & Farr, Structural Analysis and Design of Pro-
cess Equipment, (c) 1984, p 425.
Number of Bolts
Enter the bolts that the base ring design calls for. If the BASE RINGS program is in design
mode, it may change the number of bolts being used. The bolts are sized based on the
maximum load per bolt in the operating case. The computation of the load per bolt is refer-
enced in Jawad and Farr, equation 12.3. The number of bolts can be between 4 and 120.
Top Ring/Plate Type per Moss ( Type 3-Cap Plate, 4-Continuous Ring )
Enter the type of top Ring or Plate per Moss (Type 3 = Cap Plate, 4-Continuous Ring).
Refer to Dennis Moss “Pressure Vessel Design Manual” p129. If type 3 or 4 is entered, the
program will calculate per p130.
Skirt Thickness
Enter the thickness of the skirt here. This entry must be greater than 0. PVElite will auto-
matically compute the required skirt thickness for both combinations of bending and axial
stress. PVElite uses the ASME code compression allowable B for axial stresses.
Skirt Temperature
If the skirt is at an elevated temperature, enter it here. Normally, skirts are at ambient tem-
perature.
Height of Gussets
Enter the gusset dimension from the base ring to the top of the gusset plate. The forces in
the skirt are transmitted to the anchor bolts through the gussets.
minimum value will then be used, as a comparison to the actual compressive stress in the
skirt.
TOPWTH
TTA
HG
DS
DI
DC
TBA DO
BND
CG
TGA
Example Problem
FileName : CHECKS ------------------------------------- Page 1
Required Area for Each Bolt, Based on Max Load 1.7411 sq.in.
Area Available in a Single Bolt 2.6520 sq.in.
Area Available in all the Bolts 31.8240 sq.in.
Bolt Stress Based on Approximate Analysis 16413.17 psi
T = SQRT( 6 * RM / ( SB * WT )) + CA
T = SQRT( 6 * 66300 / ( 26250 * 4.1250 )) + .0000
T = 1.9167 in.
Mo = P/(4ã)[1.3(ln((2lsin(ãa/l)/(ãg)))+1]-g1*P/(4ã)
Tc = ( 6 * Mo / Fb )^1/2 + CA Required Thickness
Tc = ( 6 * 9425 / 26250 )^1/2 + .0000
Tc = 1.4678 in.
&KDSWHU
The Thin Joint Module
Introduction
The Thin Joint Module calculates the stresses in a metal bellows expansion joint of the
type typically used in piping systems and heat exchangers. The module does elastic stress
analysis for stresses due to internal pressure and closing or opening of the joint. The max-
imum combined stress is used to calculate the cycle life of the joint, which is based on the
appropriate formula in the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 26, 2001, A-
2001.
Item Number
Enter the thin walled expansion joint number. This should typically start out at 1 and
increase by one for each expansion joint in the file.
Description
Enter an alphanumeric description of the expansion joint in this field. This should relate in
some way to the expansion joint i.e. (a project id).
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature of the expansion joint. During normal operation, expansion
joints typically run cooler than the piping/pressure vessel. Determine that temperature and
enter it here.
Carbon Steel
Low Alloy Steel
Martensitic Stainless
Austenitic Stainless
Nickel Chrome Iron
Nickel Copper
Inside Diameter of Bellows
Enter the inside diameter of the bellows. This value will normally be equal to the pipe or
vessel inside diameter. Some geometries are larger in diameter than the attached cylinder.
Thus, the bellows id (d) will be larger than the vessel/pipe id.
Convolution Depth
The convolution depth is the distance from the “top” of the convolution to the “trough” of
the convolution. This is referred as the variable w in the ASME Code.
Convolution Pitch
This is the distance between the “tops” of successive bellows convolutions. This is
referred to as q in the ASME Code.
d diam tm
UNREINFORCED BELLOWS
A-A
A AF
Equalizing
Reinforcing ring
rings q
A
End equalizing
ring
W
tm
Ar
Ar
d diam
REINFORCED BELLOWS
Example Problems
The following two example problems were adapted from ASME Section VIII Div. 1
Appendix 26. The first example is for an unreinforced geometry, while the second exam-
ple is for a reinforced geometry. Agreement for the results is excellent with the exception
of the reinforced example problem. As of this printing the value Ar (area in the reinforce-
ment) in the ASME problem was incorrect. Thus the computed value in the Code for Sar-
coma is also incorrect. All of the other results are in good agreement.
RKN = ( Q / 4 - TM / 2 )
RKN = ( 1.1250 / 4 - .0500 / 2 )
RKN = .2562 in.
RKN = ( Q / 4 - TM / 2 )
RKN = ( 1.1250 / 4 - .0600 / 2 )
RKN = .2512 in.
&KDSWHU
The Thick Joint Module
Introduction
This module applies to fixed tubesheet exchangers which require flexible elements to
reduce shell and tube longitudinal stresses, tubesheet thickness, or tube-to-tubesheet joint
loads. Light gauge bellows type expansion joints within the scope of the Standards of the
Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (EJMA) are not included within the purview
of this paragraph. The analysis contained within these paragraphs are based upon the
equivalent geometry used in “Expansion Joints for Heat Exchangers” by S. Kopp and M.F.
Sayre; however, the formulas have been derived based upon the use of plate and shell the-
ory. Flanged-only and flanged-and-flued types of expansion joints can be analyzed with
this method. (TEMA 8th Edition, Paragraph RCB-8, page 61).
The formulas contained in the module are applicable based on the following assumptions:
• Applied loadings are axial
• Torsional loads are negligible
• The flexible elements are sufficiently thick to avoid instability.
• The flexible elements are axisymmetric.
• All dimensions are in inches and all forces are in pounds.
(TEMA Eighth Edition, Paragraph RCB-8.1, page 61: note that other systems of units may
be used for input and output, since the program converts these to inches and pounds for its
internal calculations.)
The sequence of calculation used by the program is as follows:
1. Select a geometry for the flexible element per RCB-8.21 (user input)
2. Determine the effective geometry constants per RCB-8.22.
3. Calculate the flexibility factors per RCB-8.3
4. Calculate the flexible element geometry factors per RCB-8.4
5. Calculate the overall shell spring rate with all contributions from flexible shell ele-
ments per RCB-8.5
6. Calculate Fax for each condition as shown in Table RCB-8.6. This requires that you
run the PVElite Tubesheet module to determine the differential expansion and shell-
side and tubeside equivalent pressures.
7. Calculate the flexible element stresses per RCB-8.7
8. Compare the flexible element stresses to the appropriate allowable stresses per the
Code, for the load conditions as noted in step 6.
9. Modify the geometry and rerun the program if necessary.
Note More than one analysis may be needed to evaluate hydrotest and uncorroded con-
ditions.
Figure 22A shows geometry for the Thick Joint module. (TEMA Figure RCB-8.21 and
RCB-8.22). Both the input geometry and the equivalent geometry used for the analysis are
shown. The discussion of input data below uses the nomenclature shown on this figure.
A recent computational change was made to the program to allow users to better comply
with the design rules for allowable stresses per appendix CC of the ASME Code. In previ-
ous versions, the program designed expansion joints based on fatigue analysis techniques.
The default behavior for computation of the allowables has not changed. If you prefer to
design per CC then check the Use App CC box. Also the program uses the minimum of
the expansion joint allowable stress and the shell allowable stress for the default to use
when designing for the shellside pressure case. If you wish to use the expansion joint
allowable only, then check the Use EXP. Jt. Allowables box.
Material Name
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not con-
tained in the database, its specification and properties can be entered manually by select-
ing Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Note that the program uses the external pressure charts to determine the modulus of elas-
ticity and material type for the analysis.
Use Appendix CC ?
Check this box to use the ASME Sec. VIII, Div.1, APP-CC design rules for allowable
stresses. Otherwise the program will use the fatigue analysis techniques.
are joined with a cylinder between them, lo or li as applicable shall be taken as half the
cylinder length. If no cylinder is used, lo and li shall be taken as zero.
Entering a very long length for this value will not disturb the results, since the TEMA pro-
cedure automatically takes into account the decay length for shell stresses and uses this
length if less than the cylinder length.
This value is shown on Figure 22A as lo.
Discussion of Results
The three most significant results for the THICK JOINT analysis are the spring constant
for the joint, the stresses in the joint, and the cycle life for the joint. These are discussed
below.
Spring Constant
The program does not calculate the deflection of the joint. Instead it calculates the spring
constant for the joint, which can be used in the Tubesheet program or elsewhere to deter-
mine the effect of the joint on the heat exchanger design.
Stresses
The program calculates the combined meridional bending and membrane stresses in the
expansion joint and the attached cylinders. According to ASME, Section VIII, Division 1,
Appendix CC, this stress should be limited to KS, where K is 1.5 for flat sections (the
annular ring or cylinders) and 3.0 for curved areas of the inner and outer torus (or sharp
corners). S is the basic allowable stress for the expansion joint material at operating tem-
perature. Note, however, that this stress limit applies only to the stresses due to pressure -
stresses due to deflection are limited by fatigue considerations rather than stress allow-
ables. Thus the program only prints the allowable membrane plus bending stress for the
case of shellside pressure.
Cycle Life
The cycle life of the joint is analyzed using the rules in the ASME Code, Section VIII,
Division 1, Appendix CC. For Series 3xx stainless steels, nickel-chromium iron alloys,
nickel-iron chromium alloys and nickel-copper alloys, the equation for cycle life is as fol-
lows:
N < [(2.2)/(( 14.2*Kg*Sn)/Eb - 0.03 )]^2.17
For carbon and low alloy steels, Series 4xx stainless steels, and high alloy steels, the equa-
tion for cycle life is:
N < [(2.0)/(( 15*Kg*Sn)/Eb - 0.011 )]^2.17
Where:
Kg = fatigue strength reduction factor which accounts for geometrical stress concentration
factors due to local thickness variations, weld geometries, and other surface conditions.
The range of Kg is 1.0 <= Kg <= 4.0 with its minimum value for smooth geometrical
shapes and its maximum for 90 deg. welded corners and fillet welds. The program uses a
Kg of 1.0 when the knuckle radius is greater than three times the expansion joint thick-
ness.
Sn = Maximum combined meridional membrane and bending stress range in a flexible
element due to the cyclic components of pressure and deflection.
Eb = Modulus of elasticity at design temperature. The program determines both the modu-
lus of elasticity and the material type from the name of the external pressure chart given by
the user. To check the name of the external pressure chart in your input, move to the mate-
rial name and press [E] (Material Edit).
Example Problem
FileName : CHECKS ---------------------------------- Page 1
Wa = 2 * BA * YA 5.1400
RJ1A = SIN( WA / 2.0 ) * SINH( WA / 2 ) 3.5134
RJ2A = COS( WA / 2.0 ) * COSH( WA / 2 ) -5.5266
ZZA = RJ1A**2 + RJ2A**2 42.8877
RK0A = SINH( WA ) + SIN( WA ) 84.4450
RK1A = ( COSH( WA ) + COS( WA ) ) / RK0A 1.0158
RK2A = ( SINH( WA ) - SIN( WA ) ) / RK0A 1.0216
RK3A = ( COSH( WA ) - COS( WA ) ) / RK0A 1.0059
Wb = 2 * BB * YB 3.2845
RJ1B = SIN( WB / 2.0 ) * SINH( WB / 2 ) 2.4803
RJ2B = COS( WB / 2.0 ) * COSH( WB / 2 ) -.1914
ZZB = RJ1B**2 + RJ2B**2 6.1887
RK0B = SINH( WB ) + SIN( WB ) 13.1872
RK1B = ( COSH( WB ) + COS( WB ) ) / RK0B .9386
RK2B = ( SINH( WB ) - SIN( WB ) ) / RK0B 1.0216
RK3B = ( COSH( WB ) - COS( WB ) ) / RK0B 1.0887
C3B = ( EB / EO ) 1.0000
C4B = (3.3731-1.707962*C2B+0.226216*C2B**2)/1000 .0017
C5B = -0.403287+0.320037*C2B-0.0307508*C2B**2 -.0779
C6B = -0.684978+0.582549*C2B-0.0547812*C2B**2 -.0911
C7B = -0.201334+0.168201*C2B-0.015728*C2B**2 -.0298
C8B = (C5B/C1B**2-C6B/C1B**3+C7B/C1B**4-C4B)
/(C3B**0.2) -.0182
EBB = 2.718**C8B .9819
&KDSWHU
The ASME Tubesheets Module
Introduction
This module computes the required thickness for tubesheets according to the ASME Code
Section VIII Division 1 Appendix AA, A-2001. Currently ASME addresses required
thickness for both U-tube tubesheets as well as fully fixed tubesheets. Other tubesheet
types such as floating tubesheets are not supported by ASME at this time.
Figure 23A shows the geometry for the ASME Tubesheets Module.
Tubesheet Number
Enter an ID number for the Tubesheet. This may be the item number on the drawing, or
numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially. Note, that more than one pressure or tem-
perature case can be run. Use the page down key, enter a new tubesheet number and
change the relevant input items.
Tubesheet Description
Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional. Entering a descrip-
tion will help you to keep up with each item when reviewing the output.
Tubesheet Thickness
Enter the tubesheet thickness that you are going to be using. For fixed exchangers, all of
the initial calculations will be performed and printed using the original tubesheet thick-
ness. PVElite will converge on the minimum required tubesheet thickness for the given
loading condition. For U-Tube geometries, PVElite will simply compute the required
thickness for the geometry.
Type of Tubesheet
ASME has two distinct types of tubesheets for analysis purposes. These are fixed and U-
tube exchangers. A fixed tubesheet exchangers is one that is subject to loads arising from
differential thermal expansion. Based on the selected tubesheet type, the program will
automatically reset other inputs on this dialog, such as tubesheet Gasketed with which side
or tubesheet integral with which side. The list below identifies the tubesheet types sup-
ported:
Number of Tubes
Enter the number of tubes in the tubesheet. This value is used to determine the total tube
area and stiffness.
Note For U-tube exchangers, this is the number of tube holes in the tubesheet. (Nor-
mally equal to 2 times the number of tubes.)
8 .165 18 .049
10 .134 19 .042
11 .109 22 .028
13 .095 24 .022
14 .083 26 .018
15 .072 27 .016
16 .065
Tube Pitch
Enter the tube pitch, the distance between the tube centers. The tube diameter, pitch, and
pattern are used to calculate the term mustar in the tubesheet thickness equation. These
rules are same for triangular and rotated triangular layouts. The rules are also the same for
square or rotated square layouts.
Length of Tubes
Enter the overall length of the tubes, the length from the inside face of one tubesheet to the
inside face of the other tubesheet. This value is used to determine the thermal expansion of
the tubes.
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required.
Where,
K End Condition
0.6 For unsupported spans between two tubesheets
For the worst case scenario enter the values of k and SL that the give maximum combina-
tion of k*SL. SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first
baffle or the tubespan between two support baffles.
For computing the allowable tube compression, the values of k and SL are required.
Where,
K End Condition
0.6 For unsupported spans between two tubesheets
For the worst case scenario enter the values of k and SL that the give maximum combina-
tion of k*SL. SL for example, could be the distance between the tubesheet and the first
baffle or the tubespan between two support baffles.
Metal Temperatures
It is important, especially when evaluating fixed tubesheets without expansion joints, that
you enter accurate values for metal temperatures for each operating condition. You may
have to run the analysis more than once to check several metal temperature cases. Fre-
quently the metal temperatures will be less severe than the design temperatures, due to
thermal resistances. For example, if the shellside fluid has a good heat transfer coefficient
and the tubeside fluid has a relatively poor heat transfer coefficient, then the tube tempera-
ture will be quite close to the shell temperature. Don’t forget to evaluate the condition of
shellside or tubeside loss of fluid. Especially for shellside loss of fluid, this design condi-
tion may govern the exchanger design.
Mean Shell Metal Temperatures. Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell
along its length, under realistic operating conditions.
Mean Tube Metal Temperatures. Enter the actual metal temperature for the tube
along its length, under realistic operating conditions.
Tubesheet Metal Temperature at the Rim. Enter the actual metal temperature for
the tubesheet at the rim, under realistic operating conditions.
Shell Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. Enter the actual metal temperature for the
shell at the tubesheet, under realistic operating conditions.
Channel Metal Temperature at Tubesheet. Enter the actual metal temperature for
the channel at the tubesheet, under realistic operating conditions.
Load
Load case description
Case #
Corroded Uncorroded
1 Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca
2 Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca
3 Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca
4 Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca
5 Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca
6 Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca
7 Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca
8 Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca
Note:
Fvt, Fvs - User defined Shellside and Tubeside vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, PT - Shell side and Tube side Design Pressures.
Th - With or without Thermal Expansion.
Ca - With or without Corrosion Allowance
Number of Bolts
Enter the number of bolts to be used in the flange analysis. This is usually an even number.
Note For gasket properties, refer to the table in Chapter 12, The Flange Module.
Gasket Thickness
Enter the gasket thickness. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c and 1d
(PVElite equivalents 3 and 4).
Nubbin Width
If applicable, enter the nubbin width. This value is only required for facing sketches 1c,
1d, 2 and 6 (PVElite equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). Note that for sketch 9 this is not a nubbin
width, but the contact width of the metallic ring.
Discussion of Results
Appendix AA of the Code is divided into two major sections. One section is for the U-
Tube exchangers and the other is for fixed types. There is a sequence of steps to go
through when performing calculations for each type of exchanger. PVElite will perform
each individual; step and print the applicable formula substitution and answer for each
step. All results shown are for the given geometry. In addition, the program will iterate for
the minimum thickness of the tubesheet. If needed PVElite will also perform the second
elastic iteration if high discontinuity stresses exist. As of version 4.1 of PVElite, the pro-
gram can run multiple load cases for the fixed tubesheet design as per the ASME code.
The table below displays the load cases that are considered.
Load
Load case description
Case #
Corroded Uncorroded
1 Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca
2 Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca
3 Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca
4 Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca
5 Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca
6 Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca
7 Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca
8 Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca
Note:
Fvt, Fvs - User-defined Shell side and Tubeside vacuum pressures or 0.0.
Ps, Pt - Shell side and Tube side Design Pressures
Th - With or without Thermal Expansion.
Ca - With or without Corrosion Allowance
When running these load cases the program automatically adjusts the allowable stresses.
For pressure only load cases (!, 2, 3, 8) the tubesheet, shell and channel allowable stresses
are 1.5 * their allowable tensile stresses respectively. For cases involving thermal and/or
pressure (4, 5, 6, 7) the tubesheet, shell and channel allowable stresses are 3.0 * their
allowable tensile stresses respectively.
Upset conditions may need to be analyzed. The user can enter his own shell/channel vac-
uum pressures for the multi-case analysis, e.g. 0, 15 psi. This will simulate one of the pro-
cess fluid streams being stopped, while the other stream continues.
In addition to satisfying stress criteria for the tubesheet, the tubes must also be capable of
withstanding the axial forces imposed on them due to the differential thermal expansion.
These forces must be less than the allowable force on the tube per the ASME code equa-
tions (App A). Tube stresses are also checked against the criteria in appendix AA.
Finally, the discontinuity stresses must be less than their allowables. If these allowables
are exceeded, PVElite will perform a second elastic iteration. This is where the plasticity
of the integral component is considered. Typically, when this iteration is performed, the
stresses will come down below their allowables. If for any reason they do not, the geome-
try of the unit must be reconsidered.
If your tubesheet contains a center groove, the groove depth should be subtracted from the
overall tubesheet thickness. Bending stress in the tubesheet, shell, or the channel can also
be reduced by having a local shell thickness adjacent to the tubesheet.
Example Problem
The following example problem is a comparison to another Heat Exchanger Program.
Both programs were in excellent agreement, including the values read from each of the
various figures. The stress results were less than .1 percent different.
ASME TUBE SHEET RESULTS PER APP. AA, 1995 WITH A-97 :
a = rc + d* / 4
a = 55.2813 + .6668 / 4
a = 55.4480 in.
Au = 2 * rc * wu
Au = 2 * 55.2813 * .0000
Au = .0000 in.^2
x = ã * a^2 - Au
x = 3.14159 * 55.4480^2 - .0000
x = 9658.7590 in.^2
P‘ = P * SQRT( 1 + Au/x )
P‘ = 1.3500 * SQRT( 1 + .0000/ 9658.76 )
P‘ = 1.3500 in.
ETA = 1 - d* / P‘
ETA = 1 - .6668 / 1.3500
ETA = .5061
K = b/a
K = 56.1250/ 55.4480
K = 1.0122
Kbar = a1/a
Kbar = 58.1250/ 55.4480
Kbar = 1.0483
Kc = ac/a
Kc = 56.5625/ 55.4480
Kc = 1.0201
XI = 2/n*(b/d)(hs/t)(1/(1-t/d))*(Es/Et)
XI = 2 / 3100 *( 56.1250 / .7500 )( .2500 / .0490 ) *
ás = 1.285/SQRT( b * hs )
ás = 1.285/SQRT( 56.1250 * .2500 )
ás = .3430 ( = 0.0 if Gasketed )
ác = 1.285/SQRT( ac * hc )
ác = 1.285/SQRT( 56.5625 * .2500 )
ác = .0000 ( = 0.0 if Gasketed )
J = 1/( 1 + ( 2*ã*b*Es*hs)/Sj*L )
J = 1/(1+(2*ã*56.1250*25054998*.2500)/49250*152.25)
J = .0034 ( = 1.0 if No Exp. Joint )
Lambdat = .3/2(d/t)*(1-2t/d)+a^2/(ndt(1-t/d)) *
[1-nd^2/(4a^2)(1-4t/d+4t^2/d^2)]
Lambdat = .3/2(.7500/.0490)*(1-2*.0490/.7500)+55.4480^2/
(3100*.7500*.0490*(1-.0490/.7500))*
[1-3100*.7500^2/(4*55.4480^2)
(1-4*.0490/.7500+4.0490^2/.7500^2)]
Lambdat = 27.7752
Qe = J(àt*Tt-às*Ts)+J*Lambdas(Ps/Es) -
(Pt/Et)[J*Lamdat+0.5*Et*b/(Es*hs)] - Ps(1-J)*wj/( Es*hs )
Qe = .00((.961E-05)*156-(.961E-05)*86)+.00*94.4252(50.00/25054998)-
(50.00/25054998)[.00*27.7752+0.5*25054998*56.1250/(25054998*.2500)
-50.00(1-.00)*.0000/(25054998*.2500)
QE = -.000221282
Xa = 2.161(n*Et*t(d-t)/(e*E*L*a)^.25 * (a/h)^.75
Xa = 2.161(3100*25054998*.0490(.7500-.0490)/
(.6087*25054998*152.25*55.4480)^.25*(55.4480/1.8125)^.75
Xa = 10.6654
Mu = 2.198/(E*h^3)[ás*hs^3*Es*b(1+ás*h+ás^2*h^2/2)
+ ác*hc^3*Ec*ac*(1+ác*h+ác^2*h^2/2)]
Mu = 2.198/(25054998*1.8125^3)[.3430*0^3*25054998*56.1250
(1+.3430*1.8125+.3430^2*1.8125^2/2)+.0000*.2500^3*
25054998*56.5625*(1+.0000*1.8125+.0000^2*1.8125^2/2)]
Mu = .2016
Gammabs = ás^2*hs^2*K^3(1+ás*h)/5.46
Gammabs = .3430^2*.2500^2*1.0122^3(1+.3430*1.8125)/5.46
Gammabs = .0023
Gammabt = ác^2*hc^2*Kc^3(1+ác*h)/5.46
Gammabt = .0000^2*.2500^2*1.0201^3(1+.0000*1.8125)/5.46
Gammabt = .0000
Gammat = 0.25*(Kc^2-1)(Kc+1)-0.5(Kc^3-K)+Gammabt
Gammat = 0.25*(1.0201^2-1)(1.0201+1)-0.5(1.0201^3-1.0122)+.0000
Gammat = -.0041
Q1 = (K-1-è*Zv)/( 1 + è*Zm )
Q1 = ( 1.0122-1- .3719* .0088)/( 1 + .3719* .1433 )
Q1 = .0085
Q2 = (a^2(Pt*Gammat+P*t*Gammabt+Ps*Gammas-P*Gammabs)+B*dundb*Gammab)/
( 1 + è*Zm )
Q2 = (55.4480^2(50.00*-.0041+11.1724*.0000+50.00
*-.0022—26.2721*.0023)+2465*57.3750*-.0147)/(1+.3719*.1433)
Q2 = -2719.0950
Q3 = Q1 + Q2/(Pea^2/2)
Q3 = .0085 + -2719.1/( -76999)
Q3 = .0438
Xa = 10.665
QZ1* = 10.300
Pe = -50.090 psi
qt = Pe * QZ1*
qt = -50.09 * 10.3001
qt = -515.9258 psi
ft = 1 - (nd^2)/(4a^2)[1-2t/d]^2
ft = 1-(3100*.7500^2)/(4*55.4480^2)[1-2*.0490/.7500]^2
ft = .8928
&KDSWHU
The Half-Pipe Module
Introduction
The PVElite Half-Pipe Module performs pressure calculations for half-pipe jackets
attached to cylindrical shells using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules.
Thickness of Shell
Enter the thickness of the shell used to withstand the internal pressure. This thickness
value will be tested to see if it can withstand both the internal shell pressure and the exter-
nally applied jacket pressure.
the user input value of thickness. This allows users to include their own mill tolerance in
their input value, without having this value further adjusted.
Discussion of Results
Shell Thickness Calculations
The first calculation the Half-Pipe Module performs is the required thickness of the shell
due to the internal pressure. This value of required thickness is calculated using Equation
1 from Paragraph UG-27 of the ASME Code. The corroded value of thickness is used in
this calculation. Because the exterior of the shell wall is also used as the internal half-pipe
jacket wall (see Figure 24A), both the corrosion allowance of the shell and the corrosion
allowance of the jacket must be accounted for. Both the calculation and the result are dis-
played in this section of the output.
Once the required thickness due to inside pressure is determined, the required thickness
due to the external pressure (jacket pressure) is determined and displayed. This value is
obtained through the pressure calculations discussed in the next section.
Therefore, the program selects the smaller of the two thicknesses, multiplies by a weld
factor (1.414), and uses this value as the minimum fillet weld size. The output report indi-
cates which of the two thicknesses that the calculation was based upon.
Summary of Results
The first values displayed in the summary section are the shell thickness values. The echo
of the input thickness is displayed along with the results of the two required thickness cal-
culations. The comparison of these results provides a quick check of whether the thickness
of the shell is governed by the internal or external pressure. The next three displayed val-
ues are the jacket pressure results. The input design pressure is shown along with the
MAWP for both the input thickness and the required thickness. The next displayed values
are those of the half-pipe jacket thickness. The input thickness is shown along with the
required thickness. Additionally, if the input thickness is not adequate, the thickness
selected by the program is displayed. Finally, the minimum fillet weld size is shown.
Example Problem
The example problem is taken from the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix
EE. The Code example problem asks to find the required thickness of a cylindrical shell
subjected to an inside pressure of 190 psi and a half-pipe jacket pressure of 300 psi. The
ID of the shell is 40 inches, the allowable stress of the shell is 16,000 psi, the joint effi-
ciency is 1.0, the half-pipe jacket is NPS 3, the allowable stress of the jacket is 12,000 psi,
and there is no corrosion allowance.
Req‘d Half-Pipe Jacket Thickness per App. EE-1, Eqn. (2) (Includes CA):
T = ( P1 * R ) / ( .85 * S1 - .6 * P1 ) + CAJ
T = ( 300.0000 * 1.6770 ) / ( .85 * 12000.00 - .6 * 300.0000 ) + .0000
T = .0502 in.
SUMMARY OF RESULTS:
&KDSWHU
The Large Opening Module
Introduction
The PVElite Large Opening Module calculates the stresses and their allowables which act
on integrally attached flat heads that have a large centrally located opening. This program
is based on the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1, Appendix 2 and Appendix 14 of the
2001 Code, A-2001.
Figure 25A shows the geometry for an attached nozzle. Figure 25B shows the geometry
for an opening without an attached nozzle.
Figure 25A
Figure 25B
Opening Description
Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional. It is however
printed on output reports. This field should be meaningful to the item you are analyzing.
Design Temperature
Enter the design temperature for this flange. This value will be used to look up the stress
values for the material you have chosen from the material tables.
other hub dimensions g1 and g0 are used to determine the flange stress factors from
Appendix 2.
Corrosion Allowance
If your specification includes a corrosion allowance enter it here. PVElite corrects all
dimensions such as the flange ID, and all hub thicknesses for the effect of corrosion. The
CA cannot be greater than any of the entered shell hub or flange thickness dimensions.
This will be flagged as an error.
Material Specification
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not con-
tained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by select-
ing Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Example Problem
The X1 Factor
X1 = ( Mo - Mh( 1 + Ft/ho ) ) / Mo
X1 = ( 310557 - 22817 ( 1 + .9086 * 2.5000 / 2.9765 ) ) / 310557
X1 = .8705
&KDSWHU
The Rectangular Vessel Module
Introduction
The PVElite Rectangular Vessel Module performs internal pressure calculations for rect-
angular vessels using the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 rules.
the Code in Sections 13-7 through 13-13. These stresses are compared to their allowables,
and a highest percentage of allowable calculation is performed.
The final calculation performed by the Rectangular Vessel module is the Maximum
Allowable Working Pressure calculation. The program computes a M.A.W.P. for all three
types of stresses (Membrane, Bending, and Total). Additionally, depending on the specific
geometry of those vessels stayed by bars, an additional M.A.W.P. is computed per Equa-
tion 2 of UG-47.
The Rectangular Vessel module takes full account of corrosion allowance. The program
uses the corroded condition for all dimensions in its calculations. The only exception is the
reinforcement calculations. The reinforcing member is assumed to be entered in its cor-
roded state.
Figure 26A - Rectangular vessel with equivalent long side thickness (Type A1)
Figure 26B - Rectangular vessel with different long side thickness (Type A2)
Figure 26J - Obround vessel stayed by stay plate/stay bars (Type B3 or B3-B)
Figure 26K - Circular vessel stayed by single diametral plate (Type C1)
Item Number
Enter the Rectangular Vessel ID number. This may be the item number on the drawing, or
numbers that start at 1 and increase sequentially.
Material Name
Enter the ASME code material specification as it appears in the ASME material allowable
tables. Alternatively, the material can be selected from the material data base by right
clicking and selecting Database, while the cursor is in this field. If a material is not con-
tained in the data base, its specification and properties can be entered manually by select-
ing Tools, Edit/Add Materials, from the Main Menu.
Type of Reinforcement
Enter the index for the type of reinforcement on the rectangular vessel.
When a reinforced vessel is selected, the first responses are those of the pitch distance and
the delta value.
Corrosion Allowance
Enter the appropriate corrosion allowance. The program adjusts the actual thickness and
the inside diameter of the vessel, and adjusts the actual thickness and the outside diameter
of the stay plate/bar.
Modulus of Elasticity
If an external pressure has been input, enter the Elastic Modulus of the material from Sub-
part 3 of Section II, Part D at design temperature.
Length of Vessel
Enter length dimension of vessel type C1.
C-Factor
The C-factor is an attachment factor for braced and stayed surfaces.
This factor is taken from UG-47, and will default to 2.1.
Delta
Material parameter used to calculate pitch.
Materials listed in Appendix 13, Table 13-8(3):
Material English SI
Vessel Radius
Enter the inside radius of the vessel type C1.
Diameter of Hole
Enter the diameter (d0, d1, d2) of the hole of corresponding length (T0, T1, T2). If the
hole is of uniform diameter, then a value for d0 is the only required entry. Refer to Figure
26L. The values for d0, d1, and d2 must be entered in decreasing diameter size.
Depth of Hole
Enter the depth (T0, T1, T2) of the hole of corresponding diameter (d0, d1, d2). If the hole
is of uniform diameter, then a value for T0 is the only required entry. Refer to Figure 26L.
The sum of the values for T0, T1, and T2 must equal to the entire side thickness.
Simple Bar Geometry—Enter the width, thickness, and length (if necessary) of the
bar.
Discussion of Results
Ligament Efficiency Calculations
When the side plates have uniform or multi diameter holes, ligament efficiency calcula-
tions are performed according to Section 13-6. For the case of uniform diameter holes, the
ligament efficiency factors em and eb for membrane and bending stresses, respectively, are
considered to be the same. In the case of multi diameter holes (see Figure 26L), the neutral
axis of the ligament may no longer be at mid thickness of the plate; in this case, for bend-
ing loads, the stress is higher at one of the plate surfaces than at the other surface.
If the calculated values of em and eb are lower than the entered midpoint joint efficiencies,
the calculated stress values are divided by these calculated ligament efficiencies. It is
important to note that if the stresses have been adjusted by the ligament efficiencies, then
the calculations for the allowable stresses will assume an E value of 1.0. This avoids incor-
rectly increasing the stress values while decreasing the allowables at the same time.
Reinforcement Calculations
The reinforcement calculations performed for vessels A4, A5, and B2 (Figures 26D, 26E,
and 26I), are discussed in section 13-8. The rectangular vessel program only addresses
those vessels in which the reinforcement on opposite side plates have the same moment of
inertia. Additionally, the reinforcement for vessels A4 and B2 is assumed to be continu-
ous, while A5 is assumed to be non-continuous.
The first reinforcement calculation is that of the maximum pitch between reinforcing
member center lines. Equation 1 of UG-47 is used to set a basic maximum distance. Using
this maximum value, equations (1a)-(1d) in Section 13-8 are used to obtain a maximum
value for both the long and short-side plates. The minimum calculated value shall be con-
sidered the maximum distance between reinforcement center lines. In addition to the
above calculations, the geometry of the reinforcement must be checked. Specifically, the
width of the reinforcing members cannot physically exceed the pitch.
Once the pitch is determined, the moment of inertia of the composite section (shell and
reinforcement) is determined by the Area-Moment method. The moment of inertia calcu-
lations are performed for locations where the plate is in compression, and then also per-
formed for locations where the plate is in tension. Equation (2) of Section 13-8 is used to
calculate the maximum width of the shell plate which can be used to compute the effective
moments of the composite section at locations where the shell plate is in compression. At
locations where the shell plate is in tension, an effective width equal to the actual pitch
distance is used in the computations.
Stress Calculations
The stress calculations are performed for membrane, bending, and total stresses. The cal-
culations are performed for both the inner and outer surface of the long and short-side
plates. These actual stress values are displayed along with their allowables in tabular form.
A positive (+) stress indicates tensile stress, while a negative (-) stress indicates compres-
sive stress.
As previously discussed, the calculated values for the membrane and bending stresses are
adjusted by the ligament efficiency calculations if em and eb are less than the joint effi-
ciency E. At the mid-side locations, the stresses are increased by dividing the calculated
value by the membrane or bending ligament efficiency. In the event that the plates have
holes but the ligament efficiencies are higher than the joint efficiency E, there is no adjust-
ment to the stress calculations, rather the allowables are adjusted by the value E.
Calculations performed on stay plates/bars are membrane stresses, and these stresses are
used in the M.A.W.P. calculations for membrane stresses. Computation of the stresses on
end plates is performed if a thickness value for the end plate is input. The calculations are
performed per UG-34 with a C factor entered by the user. These stresses are not used in
the computation of the MAWP.
Allowable Calculations
Membrane stresses are in general compared to the adjusted allowable stress, SE. Note that
for reinforced members the program compares the membrane stress to the lower of the
plate allowable stress or beam allowable stress. Note also that when there are holes in the
side, the joint efficiency may be set to 1.0 in favor of a membrane efficiency which is fac-
tored into the actual stress calculation as necessary.
Bending stresses and total stresses are in general compared to 1.5 times the adjusted
allowable stress, SE. Note that for reinforced members the program compares the actual
stress to the lower of the plate allowable stress or beam allowable stress, and also to the
lower of 2/3 times the plate yield stress or beam yield stress. It chooses the lowest of these
four combinations as the allowable for reinforced cases. Note also that when there are
holes in the side, the joint efficiency at the mid-side may be set to 1.0 in favor of a mem-
brane efficiency which is factored into the actual stress calculations as necessary.
MAWP Calculations
The Maximum Allowable Working Pressure is calculated for each of the three stress types.
The computation of the M.A.W.P. is performed by setting the stress equations equal to the
allowables, and solving for P. The minimum computed P value is considered to be the
maximum allowable working pressure for the particular stress type.
When analyzing vessels A7-B or A8-B (Figures 26G and 26H stayed by bars), an addi-
tional pressure rating is computed. If the long-side height is greater than the pitch of the
stay bars, then a pressure rating is computed per Eq. (2) of UG-47 with the long-side
height substituted for the pitch. If this value of pressure is less than the previously calcu-
lated M.A.W.P.s, then this becomes the vessel pressure rating. Similarly for vessel B3-B
(Figure 26J stayed by bars), if (L2 + R/2) is greater than the pitch, then an additional pres-
sure rating is computed per Eq. (2) of UG-47 with (L2 + R/2) substituted for the pitch.
checked for stability per equation (1) of 13-14(b). Finally, the entire cross section is
checked for column stability in accordance with equation (1) from paragraph 13-14(c).
Example Problems
Example problem 1 analyzes vessel type A1 (Figure 26A). This vessel has holes in the two
long-side plates, and uses the ligament efficiency calculations. This is the Code example
problem 13-17(a).
Example problem 2 analyzes vessel type A4 (Figure 26D). This reinforced vessel is the
Code example problem 13-17(d).
REINFORCEMENT CALCULATIONS:
Maximum Distance B/W Reinforcing Member (Eq.(1) of UG-47):
p = 16.4829 in.
Max Pitch Values for Long and Short-side Based on Equations (1a)-(1d)
from Section 13-8:
Short-side p1 = 16.1904 in.
Long-side p2 = 16.0857 in.
SUMMARY OF RESULTS:
Example problem 3 analyzes vessel type A7 (Figure 26F). This vessel which is stayed by a
single plate is a COADE generated example problem.
REINFORCEMENT CALCULATIONS:
Maximum Distance B/W Reinforcing Member (Eq.(1) of UG-47):
p = 32.1496 in.
Max Pitch Values for Long and Short-side Based on Equations (1a)-(1d)
from Section 13-8:
Short-side p1 = 45.7300 in.
Long-side p2 = 53.8952 in.
SUMMARY OF RESULTS:
Example problem 4 analyzed vessel type B1 (Figure 26H). This obround vessel is the
Code example problem 13-17(f).
SUMMARY OF RESULTS:
&KDSWHU
7KH:5&$QQH[*
0RGXOH
Introduction
The WRC 297 analysis module performs local stress calculations on cylinder to cylinder
attachments according to the Welding Research Council’s bulletin number 297 or PD
5500, Annex G.
Description
Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional.
Vessel Diameter
Enter in the actual diameter of the vessel using the Id or Od as specified above.
Design Pressure
The design pressure will be used to compute membrane stresses on the nozzle and vessel
wall. It will also be used to compute axial pressure thrust if instructed to do so.
Design Temperature
This is design temperature for the vessel. This value is used to look up allowable stresses
for the vessel and nozzle materials from the ASME Section II Part D material table.
Vessel Material
The vessel material can be typed in selected from the material database. Right Click on
this field to access the properties for this material or access the database.
Diameter of Nozzle
Enter in the actual inside or outside diameter of the nozzle as appropriate.
Torsional Moment MT
Enter the torsional moment in the units displayed above. Enter this value in accordance
with the convention used either WRC107 or PD 5500. The following figures should clar-
ify these conventions.
Circumferential Moment MC
Enter the circumferential moment MC or M1 in the units displayed above. Enter this value
in accordance with the used either WRC 107 or PD 5500. The following figures should
clarify these conventions. Note that this moment has opposite signs in these conventions.
Longitudinal Moment ML
Enter the longitudinal moment ML or M2 in the units displayed above. Enter this value in
accordance with the convention used either WRC107 or PD 5500. The following figures
should clarify these conventions.
Sample Calculation
Input Echo, WRC297 Item 1, Description: WRC NOZ
Nr/P = 0.082
Mr/P = 0.109
M0/P = 0.084
N0/P = 0.209
MrD/Mc = 0.185
NrDL/Mc = 0.118
M0d/Mc = 0.174
N0DL/Mc = 0.150
MrD/Ml = 0.143
NrDL/Ml = 0.098
M0D/Ml = 0.121
N0DL/Ml = 0.300
VESSEL Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE Au Al Bu Bl
(Stresses Normal to Top Top Bottom Bottom
longitudinal plane) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Outplane Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Normal Pressure Stress 7139 18444 7139 18444
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Outplane Stress Summary 7139 18444 7139 18444
VESSEL Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE Au Al Bu Bl
(Stresses Normal to Top Top Bottom Bottom
longitudinal plane) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Inplane Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Pressure Stress 5949 -1189 5949 -1189
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Inplane Stress Summary 5949 -1189 5949 -1189
VESSEL Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE Au Al Bu Bl
(Shear stress normal to Top Top Bottom Bottom
longitudinal plane) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Outplane Shear (Vc) 10 10 -10 -10
Outplane Shear (Vl) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Shear (Mt) 21 21 21 21
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Shear Stress Summary 31 31 11 11
VESSEL Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE Au Al Bu Bl
(Stress Intensities Top Top Bottom Bottom
Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Two * Max Shear Stress 7139 19633 7139 19633
VESSEL Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE Cu Cl Du Dl
(Stresses Normal to Left Left Right Right
circumferential plane) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Outplane Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Outplane Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Normal Pressure Stress 12494 5949 12494 5949
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Outplane Stress Summary 12494 5949 12494 5949
VESSEL Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE Cu Cl Du Dl
(Stresses parallel to Left Left Right Right
circumferential plane) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Inplane Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Inplane Pressure Stress 15469 -1189 15469 -1189
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Inplane Stress Summary 15469 -1189 15469 -1189
VESSEL Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE Cu Cl Du Dl
(Shear stress normal to Left Left Right Right
circumferential plane) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Outplane Shear (Vc) 0 0 0 0
VESSEL Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE Cu Cl Du Dl
(Stress Intensities Left Left Right Right
Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Two * Max Shear Stress 15469 7138 15469 7138
NOZZLE Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE Au Al Bu Bl
(Stresses in the Top Top Bottom Bottom
hoop direction) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Hoop Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Pressure Stress 1741 1861 1741 1861
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Hoop Stress Summary 1741 1861 1741 1861
NOZZLE Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE Au Al Bu Bl
(Stresses Normal to Top Top Bottom Bottom
pipe cross-section) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Axial Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Axial Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Axial Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Axial Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Axial Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Axial Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Axial Pressure Stress 870 870 870 870
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Axial Stress Summary 870 870 870 870
NOZZLE Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE Au Al Bu Bl
(Shear stress) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Shear due to (Vc) 28 28 -28 -28
Shear due to (Vl) 0 0 0 0
Shear due to Torsion 56 56 56 56
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Shear Stress Summary 84 84 28 28
NOZZLE Stresses
LONGITUDINAL PLANE Au Al Bu Bl
(Stress Intensities Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Two * Max Shear Stress 1749 1868 1741 1861
NOZZLE Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE Cu Cl Du Dl
(Stresses in the Left Left Right Right
hoop direction) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Hoop Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Hoop Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
NOZZLE Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE Cu Cl Du Dl
(Stresses Normal to Left Left Right Right
pipe cross-section) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Axial Membrane (P ) 0 0 0 0
Axial Bending (P ) 0 0 0 0
Axial Membrane (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Axial Bending (Mc) 0 0 0 0
Axial Membrane (ML) 0 0 0 0
Axial Bending (ML) 0 0 0 0
Axial Pressure Stress 870 870 870 870
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Axial Stress Summary 870 870 870 870
NOZZLE Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE Cu Cl Du Dl
(Shear stress) Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Shear due to (Vc) 0 0 0 0
Shear due to (Vl) -42 -42 42 42
Shear due to Torsion 56 56 56 56
----------------------- -------- -------- -------- --------
Shear Stress Summary 14 14 98 98
NOZZLE Stresses
CIRCUMFERENTIAL PLANE Cu Cl Du Dl
(Stress Intensities Outside Inside Outside Inside
-----------(psi )------------
Two * Max Shear Stress 1741 1861 1751 1870
Discussion of Results
The WRC 297 stress evaluation method computes stress intensities in the nozzle and ves-
sel wall at the junction of the intersection on the upper and lower surface at eight different
points. Typically, stress intensities can be compared with the yield stress of the material at
operating temperature. However, users should read the WRC 297 bulletin carefully for
further clarification and evaluation of stress results.
Since this method produces quite a bit of output, it may be useful to use the option to pro-
duce only the summary of results. To do this use the tools -> configuration option (miscel-
laneous tab) and check the appropriate box to produce the results in a summary fashion.
Note that this directive will affect all of the generated reports in the file.
==================================================
At Point A Point B At C
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------
Quadrant Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Surface In Out In Out In Out In Out
Circumferential Stresses:
Membrane Component (Nø/t) due to:
Radial Load -2. -2. -2. -2. -2. -2. -2. -2.
Circ. Moment -12. -12. -12. -12. 12. 12. 12. 12.
Long. Moment -4. -4. 4. 4. 4. 4. -4. -4.
Sub-Total loc. -19. -19. -10. -10. 14. 14. 5. 5.
Pressure (fp) 84. 84. 84. 84. 84. 84. 84. 84.
Sub-Total(føm) 66. 66. 74. 74. 98. 98. 90. 90.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tot. Circ. Str 174. -43. 149. 0. 12. 184. 38. 141.
Longitudinal Stresses:
Membrane Component (Nx/t) due to:
Radial Load -2. -2. -2. -2. -2. -2. -2. -2.
Circ. Moment -11. -11. -11. -11. 11. 11. 11. 11.
Long. Moment -2. -2. 2. 2. 2. 2. -2. -2.
Sub-Total loc. -15. -15. -12. -12. 11. 11. 7. 7.
Pressure (fp) 84. 84. 84. 84. 84. 84. 84. 84.
Sub-Total(fxm) 69. 69. 73. 73. 95. 95. 92. 92.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tot. Long. fx 147. -8. 108. 37. 33. 157. 72. 112.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------
&KDSWHU
The Appendix Y Module
Introduction
This module performs stress evaluation of Class 1, category 1, 2, or 3 flanges that form
identical flange pairs. This module conforms to the latest version (A-2001) of the ASME
Code Section VIII Division 1 Appendix Y.
Sample Calculation
Input Echo, App Y Flange Item 1, Description: APPY
Factor: Js
= 1/B1 * ( 2*hd/ß + hc/a ) + pi*rb
= 1/10.375(2*1.937/1.1867+0.8750/1.4578)+3.14159*0.009012
= 0.4009
Factor: Jp
= 1/B1 * ( hd/ß + hc/a ) + pi*rb
= 1/10.375(1.937/1.1867+0.8750/1.4578)+3.14159*0.009012
= 0.2435
= -( Jp * F’ * Mp )/( t^3 + Js * F’ )
= -( 0.2435 * 0.4535 * 31233.18 )/( 0.6250 + 0.4009 * 0.4535 )
= -674.8762 ft.lb.
Discussion of Results
Based on the given input the program computes the MAWP for the given geometry. With
the given loading conditions the required thickness is also computed. The program com-
putes flange stresses and compares those stresses with the appropriate allowables as
described in paragraph Y-7 of the ASME Code.
&KDSWHU
Miscellaneous Processors
File Manager
The file manager window allows the users to browse drives and directories for a file that
will be created, opened, saved or deleted. The following options are available:
• Filename - This field contains the name of the file you wish to create, open, save or
delete. Enter the name of the desired file then press [Enter] or select the OK button.
The filename is composed of two portions, the (job)name and the extension (such as
.PVI, .FIL, etc. ). The user can enter the full filename (name+extension) or just the
name; in which case, the program will add the appropriate extension.
The first portion of the filename must be eight characters or less, and only consists of
letters, numbers or ‘_’. The program will check the filename you entered (or selected)
to make sure it is valid.
• Directories - Contains the directories that may be browsed. A directory can be selected
from the list by pressing on the list’s up or down arrow, moving the cursor to the
desired directory then pressing [Enter].
• Drives - Contains the active drives on the system. The drives in this field can be
selected by pressing on the list’s up or down arrow, moving cursor to the desired drive,
then pressing [Enter]. If the drive is available the directory and file fields will be
updated. Otherwise an error message is presented.
The OK button causes the information in the filename field to be processed by the pro-
gram. If the process is successful the file manager window is then removed from the
screen. In most cases, a message window will appear after pressing this button. The user
should answer the questions presented by the message window so that the process can be
fully carried out. The only circumstances where the message window does not appear is
when there is no previously opened file. In the DELETE option, after the process is fin-
ished, the file manager window is not removed from the screen, instead the file list is
updated and the program is waiting for another DELETE event. If the user does not wish
to delete any more files, press the CANCEL button to close the file manage window.
Selecting the CANCEL button causes the file manage window to be removed without any
further processing.
The HELP button displays information about this window.
Heading Edit
Heading Edit mode allows the user to input and edit the heading and the title page for the
current job.
Material Definition
Element materials may be selected for the Material button on the Define screen. When
clicking on the Material button, the following screen is presented:
By clicking on the OK button, the material name and the appropriate material parameters
are loaded in the element. These parameters may be reviewed and modified through the
Material Edit Window by pressing the Enter key when the cursor is in the Material field.
Material Edit Window lets the user display and modify the material properties of the cur-
rent element or detail. Note that if the material is newly selected, the data displayed here
are directly from the program’s material database, otherwise the data are from the data
structure of the current element or detail. If a newly selected material can not be found in
the program’s material database, the program will assume that is a “User-defined mate-
rial”, in this case the user must define all material properties in this window.
Material Name
Enter the name of the material for this element. This program contains a database which
includes most of materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3.
P Number Thickness
Enter the thickness for this P number.
Table UCS-57 of the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 lists the maximum thickness
above which full radiography is required for welded seams. This thickness is base on the P
number for the material listed in the allowable stress tables of the Code. This value is used
only for error checking.
rial name in the material input field, the program will look into its database and determine
the external pressure chart name for this material, and enter it into this cell. The program
will also determine this chart name when you select a material name from the material
selection window.
The following are the acceptable external pressure chart names:
TEMA Number
The TEMA number is used to determine the modulus of elasticity for materials at design
temperature. These values range from 1 to 52. They can be found in the TEMA tubesheet
chapter.
Keyboard Commands
The following movements are defined for the keyboard within the program:
Exit <Shift+F3>
Help <F1>
Mark <Ctrl+F5>
Refresh <F5>
Select <Enter>
Mouse Operation
The following movements are defined for the mouse within the program:
In window objects:
Choose <Left-down-click>
Select <Left-release>
In vessel graphics:
&KDSWHU
Vessel Example Problems
Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to provide a listing for a typical vertical and horizontal ves-
sel. The actual modeling instructions have been previously outlined in the chapter 3. At
this point it is assumed that you can use the input program to create a vertical vessel or
horizontal tank.
In addition to the following examples, this program comes with many examples that reside
in the EXAMPLES subdirectory underneath the main program directory. If you wish to
access these examples, you can use the File Open command sequence while in the vessel
building part of PVElite. Once you get into the file open screen, you can choose the direc-
tory option to switch directories. Once in the EXAMPLES subdirectory, you can open any
of the existing examples and analyze them.
Vessel Example
The Vertical and Horizontal Vessel problems can now be accessed at www.COADE.com.
Index
Numerics Applications Available 1-4
1.60D.5 6-44 Are the Legs Pipe Legs 18-9
1.60D10 6-45 Area 2 Setting 5-14
1.60D2 6-44 Area Calculations for Small Nozzles 9-10
1.60D5 6-44 AREA1 or AREA2 Equal to 0 11-5
1.60D7 6-44 Area1 Setting 5-14
3D Viewer 3-32 ASCE 6-44
ASCE 7-88 Seismic Data 6-28
ASCE 7-93 Importance Factor 6-15
A
ASCE 7-93 Seismic Data 6-30
Above Ground Height 6-22, 15-7
ASCE 7-95 Code 15-6, 18-7
Absolute 6-46
ASCE 95 Wind Data 6-21
Abutting Nozzle Insertion 5-16, 11-7
ASCE Roughness Factor 6-16
Acc Based Factor Fv 6-46
ASCE Wind Data 6-15
Acc.Based Factor Fa 6-46
ASCE-95 Seismic Data 6-37
Acceleration Zone 6-34
ASME Code Weld Type 5-17
Acceptance of terms of agreement by the user 1-2
ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic Analysis of
AD-540.2 sketch b 3-25
Nozzle 17-23
Adding Details 3-42
ASME Tube Joint Reliability Factor 16-10, 23-13
Additional Area 15-5, 18-6
ASME Tubesheets 1-5
Additional Data for Reinforcing Pad 5-17
ASME Tubesheets Module 23-1
Additional Horizontal Force on Vessel 18-3
ASME UG-99(b) 6-2
AISC Member Designation 18-9
ASME UG-99(b) footnote 32 6-3
Allowable Calculations, Highest Percentage of 26-18
ASME UG-99(b) footnote 34 6-3
Allowable Stress, Ambient 19-2
ASME UG-99(c) 6-2
Allowable Stress, Ambient Tempature 14-4
Aspect Ratio (D/2H) for Elliptical Heads 15-8
Allowable Stress, Ambient Temperature 16-5, 23-17
Aspect Ratio for Elliptical Heads 10-9, 11-10
Allowable Stress, Design Temperature 14-4, 16-5, 23-17
Assigning Details to Elements 5-3
Allowable Stress, Operating 19-2
Attached B16.5 Flange Rating 19-3
Amplification Factor ac 6-30
Attached Flange Rating 11-5
Analysis Type 12-5
Attachment Description 17-2
Analysis, Performing an 9-20
Attachment Factor for Flat Head 10-10
Analyze Baseplate 18-3
Attachment Factor for Welded Flat Heads 11-11
Analyze Menu 3-22, 9-6
Attachment Number for this Analysis 17-2
Analyze Shellside + Differential Expansion 22-7
Axial Force 12-12, 18-14, 18-29
Analyze Shellside + Tubeside + Differential Expansion
Axial Force for External Pressure Case 13-7
22-7
Axial Force for Internal Pressure Case 13-7
Analyze Shellside + Tubeside Pressure 22-7
Axial Forces on the Cone 13-4
Analyze Shellside Pressure 22-7
Axial Length of Kettle Cone (LC) 16-12
Analyze Tubeside + Differential Expansion 22-7
Axial Pressure Thrust 27-5
Analyze Tubeside Pressure 22-7
Axial Thickness of Reinforcing Ring 13-8
Angle Between Branch and Header 19-3
Axial Thrust Load "P" 27-3
Angle Between Nozzle and Shell 5-13
Angle Between Nozzle and Shell (Usually 90) entered in
description field 5-13 B
Angle Sections Rolled the Hard Way 6-7 B16.5 Flange 5-13, 11-11, 19-5
ANSI Flange MAWP 7-4 B16.5 Flange, Grade for Attached 5-13, 11-11, 19-5
Apex Angle 10-10, 11-11 Backing Ring 14-7
Appendix Y Flanges 1-7 Backing Ring Actual Thickness 14-8
Appendix Y Module 28-1 Backing Ring Inside Diameter 14-8
i
PVElite - User Guide
ii
PVElite - User Guide
iii
PVElite - User Guide
Diameter of Nozzle, Actual 5-14, 11-6 Enter the Unsupported Tube Sran, SL for MAX (k*SL)
Diamter, Minimum 5-15 23-12
Differential Design Pressure 16-7 Entire agreement 1-3
Differential Expansion 22-6 Equipment Class 6-25
Differential Expansion Pressure 16-16, 22-6 Error Checking 3-9, 7-3
Differential Expansion Pressure (from Tubesheet) Cor- Escarpment 15-7, 18-7
roded 22-6 ESL Installation on a Network 2-7
Disclaimer - CAESAR II 1-4 ESL Menu 3-38, 9-17
Discussion of Results 23-19 Example Problem 10-16, 11-16, 12-19, 13-11, 13-14, 13-
Distance between Gussets 5-20, 18-12 18, 14-11, 14-14, 15-14, 16-19, 19-10, 20-13, 21-6, 22-
Distance between Tube Centers 23-7 11, 23-19, 24-8, 25-5, 26-20
Distance from Bolts to Gussets 20-10 Examples 17-29, 18-17
Distance from Flange Centroid to Head Centerline 14-7 Expanded Portion of Tube, Length of 23-7
Distance from Ring Centroid to Shell Surface 10-11 Expansion Joint Allowable Stress at Ambient Tempera-
Distance from Saddle to Vessel Tangent 15-3 ture 22-4
Distance from the Edge of the Leg to the Bolt Hole, "z" Expansion Joint Bellows Material 21-2
18-24 Expansion Joint Corrosion Allowance 22-3
Distance from Vessel Centerline to Saddle Base 15-6, Expansion Joint Description 22-3
15-7 Expansion Joint Flange Wall Thickness 22-3
Distance from Vessel OD to Lug Midpoint 5-19 Expansion Joint Inside Diameter 16-11, 22-3
Distance from Vessel OD to Support Contact Point 18- Expansion Joint Inside Knuckle Offset (Straight Flange)
11 22-5
Distance to Centroid of Reinforcing Section 13-8 Expansion Joint Inside Knuckle Radius 22-5
Distance to Crest 15-7, 18-7 Expansion Joint Number 22-3
Distance to Ring Centroid 5-8 Expansion Joint Opening Per Convolution 21-2
Distance to Ring Centroid from Shell Surface 15-9 Expansion Joint Outside Diameter 22-3
Distance to Site 6-22, 15-7, 18-7 Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Offset 22-5
DXF File Generation Option 3-53 Expansion Joint Outside Knuckle Radius 22-5
Expansion Joint Projection from Shell OD 23-11
E Exposure Constant 6-15, 6-17, 6-19, 6-21
Earthquake Load Calculation 7-6 Extended Portion of Tubesheet, Thickness of 16-14
EarthQuake Parameters Fa and Fv 6-41 External Loads, Specifying 12-10
Edit Menu 9-5 External Pressure 10-5, 11-3, 26-13
EigenSolver 3-27 External Pressure calculations 7-3
El Centro 6-44 External Software Lock 2-1
Elastic Modules for Plates 20-10 Extruded Outlet Height 19-3
Elastic Modulus at Ambient Temperature 21-3, 21-4, 21- Extruded Outlet Inside Diameter 19-4
5 Extruded Outlet, Thickness of 19-3
Elastic Modulus at Design Temperature 21-3
Element’s From Node 4-2 F
Element’s To Node 4-3 Failure Path Calculations 11-15
End Reinforcing, Large 13-5 Fastener Allowable Stress at Ambient Temperature 21-4
Enter the Dimension G for the Backing Flange 23-8 Fastener Allowable Stress at Operating Temperature 21-
Enter the Outside Diameter of the Tubesheet 23-8 4
Enter the Shell/Channel Side Vacuum Pressures 16-13 Fastener Bolt Length 21-4
Enter the Shell/Channelside Vacuum Pressures 23-14 Fastener Bolt Present 21-3
Enter the Tube End Condition k, Corresponding to Span Fastener Cross-Sectional Area 21-4
SL 16-12 Fastener Material Specification 21-4
Enter the Tube End Condition, K Corresponding to Span File Manager 29-1
SL 23-12 File Menu 3-17, 9-2
Enter the Unsupported Tube Span, SL for Max (k*SL) Fillet or Groove Weld Leg Length 16-10
16-11 Fillet Radius Between Vessel & Nozzle (r) 17-16
iv
PVElite - User Guide
Fillet Weld Between Flange and Shell/Channel 16-14 Gasket Outer Diameter 12-7, 14-6, 16-15, 23-16
Fillet Weld Leg Connecting Ring to Shell 10-10 Gasket Thickness 12-9, 14-6, 16-15, 23-16
Fillet Weld Size 24-6 Generating Output 8-1
Final Basering Geometry, Selection of 20-5 Geometric Constants, Pressure and Thickness Calcula-
Fireproofing with Insulation 5-35 tions 16-16
Flange Centroid 14-7 Global Forces/Moments (SUS, EXP, OCC) 17-15
Flange Depth 14-8 Groove in Tubesheet, Depth of 16-8
Flange Design 12-17 Groove Weld Between Nozzle and Vessel 5-16, 11-12
Flange Designation 12-4 Groove Weld Between Pad and Nozzle Neck 11-12
Flange Diameter, Outside 14-5, 16-13, 23-14 Groove Weld between Pad and Nozzle Neck 5-17
Flange Distance to Top 6-3 Gusset Plate Height 18-12
Flange Face Facing Sketch 12-9, 14-6, 16-15, 23-16 Gusset Plate, Mean Width 18-12
Flange Face Inner Diameter 12-7, 14-6, 16-15, 23-16 Gusset Plates, Thickness of 18-12, 20-10
Flange Face Outer Diameter 12-6, 14-6, 16-14, 23-15 Gussets 5-20, 18-12, 20-8
Flange Face to Attached Head 14-8 Gussets and Bolts 20-10
Flange ID 12-6 Gussets Height 5-20, 20-10
Flange Inside Diameter 14-5 Gussets per Bolt, Number of 20-10
Flange Module 12-1 Gussets, Mean Width 5-20
Flange Number 12-4 Gussets, Thickness of 5-20
Flange OD 12-6 Gust Response Factor 6-25
Flange Rigidity Calculations 12-17
Flange Stresses, Allowable 12-15 H
Flange Thickness 12-6 Half Apex Angle for Conical Sections 10-10, 11-11
Flange Type 12-4 Half-Pipe Jacket 1-6, 24-4
Flange, Slotted 14-7 Half-Pipe Jacket Thickness Calculations 24-6
Flange, Thickness of 14-5 Half-Pipe Jacket, Thickness of 24-4
Flange/Bolt Material Specification 12-6 Half-Pipe Module 24-1
Flanged Portion of Head 14-9 Half-Pipe Section Description 24-3
Flanges 1-4, 1-6 Head Joint Efficiency 15-3
Flanges with Different Bending Moments 12-14 Head Thickness 15-3
Flanges, Loose-Type 12-5 Head Type 15-3
Flat Face Flanges with Full Face Gaskets 12-5 Head, Thickness of 14-4
Flat Head Outside Diameter 25-3 Header Dimension Basis 19-3
Flat Head Thickness 25-3 Heading Edit 29-3
Floating Head Description 14-3 Heat-Treated Materials 29-9
Floating Head Identification Number 14-3 Height above Ground 6-22
Floating Head Module 14-1 Height above Ground (z) 15-7
Floating Head Type (b, c, d) 14-3 Height of Center Web 5-27, 15-5
Floating Heads 1-5 Height of Composite Stiffener 5-26
Flohead Calculation 9-10 Height of Extruded Outlet, HX 19-3
Force Coefficient 15-5, 18-6 Height of Gusset Plate 18-12
Force Factor 6-37 Height of Gussets 5-20, 20-10
Force in X, Y, or Z Direction 5-23 Height of Hill (H) 6-22
Force Modification Factor 6-33 Height of Hill or Escarpment (H) 15-7, 18-7
Forces and Moments 5-23 Height of Liquid Column Hydrotest 10-9
From Node 5-6 Height of Liquid Column Operating 10-9
Full Face Gasket 14-5 Height of Liquid Column, Operating 11-10
Full Run 1-10 Height of Liquid on Tray 5-28
Height of Lug from Center of Hole to Bottom 18-14
G Height of Packed Section 5-31
Gasket and Gasket Factors 28-2 Height of Stiffener from Shell Surface 15-9
Gasket Inner Diameter 12-7, 14-6, 16-15, 23-16 Height of Vessel above Grade 15-6
v
PVElite - User Guide
vi
PVElite - User Guide
vii
PVElite - User Guide
viii
PVElite - User Guide
ix
PVElite - User Guide
x
PVElite - User Guide
xi
PVElite - User Guide
xii
PVElite - User Guide
xiii
PVElite - User Guide
User-Entered Seismic Zone Factor CS 15-7, 18-7 Wear Pad Extension Above Horn of Saddle 15-4
User-Specified Root Area of a Single Bolt 20-10 Wear Pad Thickness 15-4
Wear Pad Width 15-4
V Wear Plate Contact Angle (degrees) 5-27
Velocity Zone 6-35 Wear Plate, Thickness of 5-26
Version 3.5 Improvements 1-11 Web Location 5-27
Version 3.6 Improvements 1-11 Web Location Center or Side 15-5
Version 4.1 Improvements 1-13 Web Thickness 5-27
Version 4.3 Improvements 1-14 Web, Thickness of 15-5
Vertical Vessels 1-4 Weight 5-22, 15-2
Vessel 17-3 Weight & Volume Results, No Corrosion Allowance 10-
Vessel above Grade 15-6 14
Vessel Analysis Calculations 7-8 Weight of Details 7-4
Vessel Centerline 15-6, 15-7 Weight of Elements 7-4
Vessel Centerline, Distance or Offset 5-6 Weight of One Lug 5-20
Vessel Components (Details), Individual 3-50 Weight, Miscellaneous 5-22, 6-4
Vessel Corrosion Allowance 27-2 Weld Along Bottom of Lifting Lug, Length of 18-14
Vessel Data, General 6-1 Weld Around Sides of Lug, Length of 18-14
Vessel Description 15-1, 18-2 Weld Leg at Back of Ring 12-11
Vessel Description, Rectangular 26-9 Weld Leg Size Between Inward Nozzle and Inside Shell
Vessel Design Pressure 15-1 5-16, 11-12
Vessel Design Temperature 15-2 Weld Leg Size for Fillet Between Nozzle and Shell or
Vessel Detail Data 5-1 Pad 5-16, 11-12
Vessel Details, Design and Analysis of 3-14 Weld Neck Flanges 12-4
Vessel Diameter 27-1 Weld Size Calculations 11-15
Vessel Example Problems 30-1 Weld Size Thickness 4-35
Vessel Leg Input 18-8 Weld Strength Calculations 11-15
Vessel Material 27-2 Width of Gusset Plates, Average 20-10
Vessel Nozzles 1-4 Width of Partition Gasket 14-7, 16-16, 23-17
Vessel Number 15-1 Width of Reinforcing Member 26-15
Vessel OD 5-19, 18-11 Width of Reinforcing Ring 10-10
Vessel Orientation 18-9 Width of Saddle 5-26
Vessel Radius 26-14 Width of the Pass Partition Gasket 12-12
Vessel Stress Concentration Factor 27-2 Width of Wear Plate 5-26
Vessel Tangent 15-3 Wind 5-23
Vessel Type 17-3, 26-10 Wind & Seismic Data 6-14
Vessel Wall Thickness 17-3, 27-1 Wind Data 6-14
Vessel, Basic Definition of 3-40 Wind Deflection 7-6
Vessel, Diameter of 17-3 Wind Design Code 6-14
Vessel, Distance from Outside of 26-15 Wind Exposure 15-6, 18-6
Vessel, Length of 26-13 Wind for Hydrotest 6-15, 6-17, 6-19, 6-21, 6-24, 6-26
Vessel, Outside Diameter 18-2 Wind Load Calculation 7-6
Vessel/Nozzle Centerline Direction Cosines 17-13 Wind Loads to Vessel, Applying 15-3
Vessels, General 1-4 Wind Pressure on Vessel 15-5, 18-6
Vibration Period 6-36 Wind Profile Data 6-26
View Menu 3-30, 9-17 Wind Shape Factor 3-26
Vortex Shedding 6-5 Wind Speed 6-15, 6-17, 6-19, 6-21
Wind Speed, Basic 15-6, 18-6
Wind Zone Number 6-24
W Windows Server Installation 2-8
Wall Thickness for Axial Stress, Selecting 6-9 Working Pressure 10-13, 10-14, 11-15, 12-16
Wall Thickness for External Pressure, Selecting 6-9 WRC 107 1-7
Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure, Selecting 6-9
xiv
PVElite - User Guide
xv
COADE, Inc.
12777 Jones Rd., Suite 480
Houston, Texas 77070
Phone: (281)890-4566
Fax: (281)890-3301
E-mail: techsupport@coade.com
WWW: www.coade.com
PVElite
USER'S GUIDE
V E R S I O N 4.30
( L A S T R E V I S E D 1/2002 )